WO2019240070A1 - Action verifying system - Google Patents

Action verifying system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019240070A1
WO2019240070A1 PCT/JP2019/022897 JP2019022897W WO2019240070A1 WO 2019240070 A1 WO2019240070 A1 WO 2019240070A1 JP 2019022897 W JP2019022897 W JP 2019022897W WO 2019240070 A1 WO2019240070 A1 WO 2019240070A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
unit
terminal
notification
information
check system
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/022897
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
大輔 桐生
Original Assignee
本田技研工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 本田技研工業株式会社 filed Critical 本田技研工業株式会社
Priority to JP2020525549A priority Critical patent/JPWO2019240070A1/en
Publication of WO2019240070A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019240070A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/103Detecting, measuring or recording devices for testing the shape, pattern, colour, size or movement of the body or parts thereof, for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/11Measuring movement of the entire body or parts thereof, e.g. head or hand tremor, mobility of a limb
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08BSIGNALLING OR CALLING SYSTEMS; ORDER TELEGRAPHS; ALARM SYSTEMS
    • G08B25/00Alarm systems in which the location of the alarm condition is signalled to a central station, e.g. fire or police telegraphic systems
    • G08B25/01Alarm systems in which the location of the alarm condition is signalled to a central station, e.g. fire or police telegraphic systems characterised by the transmission medium
    • G08B25/04Alarm systems in which the location of the alarm condition is signalled to a central station, e.g. fire or police telegraphic systems characterised by the transmission medium using a single signalling line, e.g. in a closed loop
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/005Traffic control systems for road vehicles including pedestrian guidance indicator
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M11/00Telephonic communication systems specially adapted for combination with other electrical systems

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an operation confirmation system.
  • This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-111419 filed in Japan on June 11, 2018 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-146316 filed in Japan on August 2, 2018 And their contents are incorporated herein.
  • the system takes an image of the front of the child with a camera attached to the carrying bag, and transmits the image obtained by the imaging to a terminal device operated by a child's guardian or the like via a communication network. To do. Further, the voice of the guardian or the like collected by the microphone of the terminal device is transmitted via the communication network and output from the speaker on the back.
  • the camera attached to the carrying bag it is difficult to confirm the movement of the child in a place where there is a danger such as a position crossing an intersection or a road.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide an operation confirmation system capable of confirming a predetermined motion of a mobile person.
  • An operation check system is provided in a terminal carried by a mobile person, an operation acquisition unit that acquires the mobile user's action, and a server that can communicate with the terminal or the terminal. And an operation determination unit that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed based on the operation acquired by the operation acquisition unit.
  • the motion acquisition unit acquires the forward movement of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit is configured to stop the forward movement from stopping the forward movement from the forward movement. You may judge that
  • the operation acquisition unit includes a position acquisition unit that acquires a current position of the terminal, and the operation determination unit is based on the current position acquired by the position acquisition unit. You may judge.
  • the position acquisition unit may perform positioning using electromagnetic waves received from outside the terminal.
  • the position acquisition unit may perform positioning based on an inquiry between electromagnetic waves from surrounding objects and stored map information.
  • the operation acquisition unit includes a speed acquisition unit that acquires the movement speed of the terminal, and the operation determination unit is based on the movement speed acquired by the speed acquisition unit. You may judge.
  • the speed acquisition unit may be a detection device that is provided in the terminal and detects a physical quantity.
  • the motion acquisition unit acquires the motion of the head of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit swings the head to the left or right with respect to the moving direction of the mobile person. You may judge that
  • the motion acquisition unit acquires the orientation of the face of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit directs the orientation of the face to the left and right with respect to the movement direction of the mobile person. You may judge that
  • the motion acquisition unit acquires at least one of the position and movement of the hand of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit has the hand part of the mobile user. It may be determined that it is located in a predetermined area which is an area higher than the shoulder portion of.
  • the motion acquisition unit is a remote detection unit that remotely detects at least one of the position and movement of an object outside the terminal. May be included.
  • the remote detection unit includes a reception unit that receives electromagnetic waves from the object, and the terminal includes the hand unit located in the predetermined area. You may arrange
  • the terminal may be arranged such that the head of the moving person is further within the detection range of the receiving unit.
  • the terminal or the server stores a set position that is a geographical position set in advance so that the predetermined operation is performed. May be provided.
  • the set position may be set to a specific position where there is a possibility of danger to the mobile person on a road on which the mobile person passes.
  • the road may include an intersection where the road intersects, and the set position may be set at the intersection.
  • the road may include a roadway through which a vehicle passes and a sidewalk that is partitioned, and the set position may be set on the sidewalk at the intersection.
  • the set position is based on input information related to the movement start point and the movement end point of the mover, and the movement start point and the movement end point It may be set on the route.
  • the terminal or the server may include a position setting unit that sets the set position on the route based on the movement start point and the movement end point.
  • the set position may be set based on input information related to position designation for the terminal or another terminal different from the terminal. .
  • the input information indicates a position on a map including a road part region and a non-road part region, and when the input information is located in the non-road part region, You may provide the position correction
  • the road part region includes a roadway part region and a sidewalk part region
  • the position correction unit includes the input information in the non-road part region or the roadway part region. When located, the input information may be corrected to the adjacent sidewalk area.
  • the set position which is a geographical position set in advance so that the predetermined operation is performed by the mobile person is the first set position.
  • a second setting position different from the first setting position, and the terminal or the server performs the first determination result determined by the operation determination unit at the first setting position and the operation at the second setting position.
  • An evaluation unit that compositely evaluates the movement of the mobile person may be provided based on the second determination result determined by the determination unit.
  • the terminal or the server includes an output unit that outputs the evaluation to the outside of the terminal or to another terminal provided to be communicable with the terminal or the server. You may prepare.
  • the output unit may output the evaluation outside the terminal and may not output in the vicinity of the set position.
  • the output unit may output the evaluation to the other terminal and sequentially output the evaluation at the set position.
  • the operation determination unit may be provided in the terminal, and the evaluation unit may be provided in the server.
  • the storage unit is provided in the terminal or the server and stores a set position that is a preset geographical position; And a notifying unit for notifying the approach of the terminal to the set position at a predetermined distance from the set position.
  • the notification unit may increase the amount of notification as the terminal approaches the set position from the remote position.
  • the notification unit may decrease the notification amount as the terminal moves away from the set position after the start of the notification.
  • the notification unit may stop the notification when the operation determination unit determines the predetermined operation after the start of the notification. Good.
  • the notification unit stops the notification when the terminal is separated from the set position by a predetermined amount after the start of the notification. May be.
  • the terminal or the server includes a position acquisition unit that acquires a current position of the terminal, and the terminal based on the current position. And a position determination unit that determines that the position is within a notification area that is closer to the set position than the position.
  • the position determination unit may determine that the terminal is located in the notification area based on a linear distance between the current position and the set position.
  • the terminal or the server includes a speed acquisition unit that acquires a movement speed of the terminal, and the notification unit reports the notification based on the movement speed. You may provide the alerting
  • the notification correction unit may correct the start of the notification earlier as the moving speed is higher than when it is slower.
  • the notification correction unit may correct the notification amount so that the amount of the notification increases as the moving speed increases.
  • the terminal or the server may include a speed acquisition unit that acquires a moving speed of the terminal, and the terminal based on the moving speed.
  • a position determination unit that determines that the position has been reached may be provided.
  • the position determination unit may determine that the remote position has been reached based on an arrival time to the set position obtained based on the moving speed.
  • the mobile person may be a pedestrian.
  • the pedestrian may be a child.
  • the terminal may be arranged in the traveling object of the mobile person.
  • the carry item may be a shoulder bag.
  • the shoulder bag may be a shoulder bag.
  • the motion acquisition unit and the motion determination unit it can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion has been performed.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not forward movement stop has been performed as a predetermined motion.
  • the accuracy of the current position of the terminal can be improved by positioning electromagnetic waves received from, for example, a satellite, a base station, and various facilities.
  • the current position of the terminal can be acquired by estimation based on sensing by a range sensor, a rider, a camera, and the like and map information.
  • the moving speed of the terminal can be detected stably and directly with high accuracy, for example, without depending on information received from the outside.
  • the determination result of the left and right movement of the head can be easily used for the operation evaluation of whether or not the left and right confirmation operation or the like has been performed as the predetermined operation.
  • the determination result of the left and right face movements can be easily used for the operation evaluation of whether or not the left / right confirmation operation has been performed as the predetermined operation.
  • the determination result of the position and movement of the hand can be easily used for operation evaluation or the like as to whether or not a hand raising operation or the like has been performed as a predetermined operation.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily utilized for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position has been performed.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to a set position with a risk on a traffic road has been performed.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion judgment can be easily utilized for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to a set position with a traffic risk on a traffic road has been performed. it can.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position on the sidewalk has been performed.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position on the movement route has been performed.
  • setting of the setting position by the user or the like can be easily supported.
  • direct designation of the setting position by the user or the like can be easily supported.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily utilized for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to a set position on the road has been performed.
  • the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position on the sidewalk has been performed.
  • the movement of the moving person can be evaluated in a complex and accurate manner.
  • confirmation of operation evaluation by the user or the like can be easily supported.
  • confirmation of real-time operation evaluation at another terminal by a user or the like can be easily supported.
  • the evaluation accuracy can be improved by performing the behavioral evaluation on the server.
  • the movement of the pedestrian can be acquired and determined.
  • the case of (41) above it is possible to acquire and determine the behavior of the child.
  • the case of (42) above it is possible to prevent the mobile person from forgetting to carry the terminal.
  • the accuracy of the acquisition and determination of the operation can be improved by arranging the terminal around the shoulder of the moving person.
  • the terminal is arranged from the shoulder to the back of the mobile person so that the terminal is prevented from interfering with the mobile user's various operations, and the accuracy of operation acquisition and determination is improved. Can do.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an information communication system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the information communication system 1 includes a first mobile terminal 2 (first terminal), a second mobile terminal 3 (second terminal), a data center 4 (center), and a server 5.
  • the first mobile terminal 2, the second mobile terminal 3, the data center 4, and the server 5 are connected to each other via a network 6.
  • the network 6 is a mobile communication network, for example.
  • the mobile communication network is, for example, a fourth generation mobile communication network or a fifth generation mobile communication network.
  • the network 6 includes a base station and the like.
  • the first portable terminal 2 is a terminal that is carried by a bearer (for example, a child such as a child) who is a watching target.
  • the first portable terminal 2 is a robot having a communication function.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 transmits at least one of position information, the same group pedestrian information, peripheral pedestrian information, and vehicle information to the data center 4 via the network 6.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 receives at least one of traffic information, a message, and emergency information transmitted from the data center 4 via the network 6.
  • the configuration of the first mobile terminal 2 will be described later.
  • the same group pedestrian information is, for example, the same group pedestrian information indicating the same group pedestrian who attends or leaves school together.
  • the peripheral pedestrian information is information indicating a pedestrian walking around the carrier.
  • the vehicle information is vehicle information of a road on which walking is performed.
  • the second mobile terminal 3 is a terminal possessed by a guardian of a carrier (for example, a child such as a child) to be watched over.
  • the 2nd portable terminal 3 is a smart phone, a tablet terminal, or a smart watch, for example.
  • the second portable terminal 3 receives the first portable terminal position information regarding the position of the first portable terminal 2 transmitted by the data center 4 via the network 6. Note that the first portable terminal position information is image information. The configuration of the second mobile terminal 3 will be described later.
  • the data center 4 includes a communication unit 41, a control unit 42, a model storage unit 43, and a storage unit 44.
  • the communication unit 41 outputs position information, the same group pedestrian information, surrounding pedestrian information, vehicle information, and the like received from the first mobile terminal 2 via the network 6 to the control unit 42.
  • the communication unit 41 outputs disaster information, suspicious person information, emergency information, and the like received from the server 5 via the network 6 to the control unit 42.
  • the communication unit 41 transmits the danger notification output by the control unit 42 to the first mobile terminal 2 via the network 6.
  • the communication unit 41 transmits traffic information, messages, emergency information, and the like output from the control unit 42 to the first mobile terminal 2 via the network 6.
  • the communication unit 41 transmits the first mobile terminal position information, the emergency notification, the voice message, and the like output from the control unit 42 to the second mobile terminal 3 via the network 6. Further, the communication unit 41 receives a signal of a detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 from the first portable terminal 2 and outputs the received signal to the control unit 42.
  • the control unit 42 stores the position information received from the first mobile terminal 2 in the storage unit 44.
  • the control unit 42 stores the suspicious person information received from the server 5 in the storage unit 44.
  • the suspicious person information includes the position information where the suspicious person appears, the time when the suspicious person appears, and the like.
  • the control unit 42 generates a movement trajectory of the person who carries the first mobile terminal 2 based on the position information and map information stored in the storage unit 44.
  • the control part 42 produces
  • the control unit 42 outputs the generated first mobile terminal position information to the communication unit 41.
  • the control unit 42 includes position information and vehicle information received from the first mobile terminal 2, emergency information, disaster information and suspicious person information received from the server 5, model information stored in the model storage unit 43, and storage unit 44. Is set on the basis of the map information and the position information stored therein, and information indicating the set dangerous place is stored in the storage unit 44.
  • a dangerous location is a specific location where danger may occur, such as a location where a disaster has occurred, a location where there are many traffic accidents, or a location where a suspicious person appears.
  • the control unit 42 generates a danger notification based on the map information stored in the storage unit 44 and information indicating the dangerous location and the received position information, and outputs the generated danger notification to the communication unit 41.
  • the control unit 42 includes position information and vehicle information received from the first portable terminal 2, emergency information received from the server 5, model information stored in the model storage unit 43, and map information and position stored in the storage unit 44. Based on the information, at least one of traffic information, a message, and emergency information is generated.
  • the message is an audio signal, which is text information converted into an audio signal by a well-known method using a language model or a dictionary.
  • the control unit 42 outputs the generated traffic information, message, and emergency information to the communication unit 41.
  • the control unit 42 outputs the generated message as a voice message, and outputs emergency information to the communication unit 41 as an emergency notification.
  • control unit 42 associates the first portable terminal 2 possessed by the carrier with the second portable terminal 3 possessed by the guardian and stores it in the storage unit 44 based on the telephone number or identification information of the portable terminal. Let As a result, the data center 4 performs processing on a plurality of sets of the first mobile terminal 2 and the second mobile terminal 3.
  • the model storage unit 43 stores a statistical regional traffic model, a traffic prediction model, and the like as model information.
  • the statistical regional traffic model statistically indicates the traffic conditions in the area, and the data center 4 obtains data relating to map information or traffic information from mobile terminals, etc., and statistically calculates traffic information in each area. It is the model shown in.
  • the traffic prediction model is a model for predicting the traffic volume in the corresponding region in the future from the traffic situation in each region accumulated in the past, and may be determined based on the data from the statistical regional traffic model.
  • the traffic prediction model may be the traffic volume at the time of going to and from school on the route of the going to and from school of the carrier carrying the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the storage unit 44 stores map information.
  • the map information includes, for example, a map that includes a school route from home to school, location information of stores (such as supermarkets, bookstores, and stationery stores) to which the carrier departs, and the location of a cram school or the like to go to before going home Information.
  • the map information includes information such as sidewalks and road route networks (divergence points and branches).
  • the storage unit 44 stores position information of the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the storage unit 44 stores information indicating a dangerous place and suspicious person information.
  • storage part 44 memorize
  • the server 5 is installed in, for example, a school and a ward office.
  • the server 5 transmits disaster information related to natural disasters such as earthquakes and typhoons and suspicious person information to the data center 4 via the network 6.
  • the data center 4 may acquire such information through communication with the server 5.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a usage scene of the information communication system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 is used by being attached to a shoulder belt of a school bag, for example.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 includes a microphone, a radar, a speaker, a position detection unit, and the like.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 acquires and transmits a voice spoken by a child carrying the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 transmits a radar detection result signal to the data center 4.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 receives information and messages transmitted from the data center 4 and reproduces and notifies them.
  • a school bag is an example of a carried item, a shoulder bag, and a shoulder bag.
  • the data center 4 transmits the traffic information, the message, and the emergency information generated based on the information received from the first mobile terminal 2 and the information received from the server 5 to the first mobile terminal 2. Further, the data center 4 transmits the first mobile terminal location information, the emergency notification, and the voice message generated based on the information received from the first mobile terminal 2 and the information received from the server 5 to the second mobile terminal 3. To do. Note that the data center 4 has real-time information captured by the plurality of first mobile terminals 2 (for example, the current position and the same, for example) when another child has the other first mobile terminal 2 at the time of going to and from school. Group pedestrian information, surrounding pedestrian information, vehicle information, etc.) may be mutually used to generate each information.
  • the second portable terminal 3 receives the first portable terminal position information including the map information including the route that the child carrying the first portable terminal 2 is walking from the data center 4, and the received first portable terminal position information Is displayed as status information.
  • the second mobile terminal 3 receives the emergency notification and voice message transmitted from the data center 4, and displays or reproduces the received emergency notification or voice message. The image displayed on the second mobile terminal 3 will be described later.
  • the server 5 transmits, for example, broadcast contents by the disaster prevention administrative radio to the data center 4 via the network 6.
  • the usage scene shown in FIG. 2 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the first mobile terminal 2 according to the present embodiment.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 includes a communication unit 21, a radar 22, a microphone 23, a position detection unit 24, a vibrator 25, a speaker 26, a display unit 27, an acceleration sensor 28, and a control unit 29.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 may include an operation unit.
  • the communication unit 21 includes, for example, a communication IC card, a communication antenna, and a communication module.
  • the communication unit 21 transmits information output by the control unit 29 (for example, position information, same group pedestrian information, peripheral pedestrian information, and vehicle information) to the data center 4 via the network 6.
  • the communication unit 21 receives information (for example, traffic information, messages, and emergency information) transmitted by the data center 4, and outputs the received information (for example, traffic information, messages, and emergency information) to the control unit 29.
  • the communication unit 21 receives the danger information transmitted by the data center 4 and outputs the received danger information to the control unit 29.
  • the radar 22 includes a front radar that detects a front object around the first portable terminal 2 and a rear radar that detects an object behind the first portable terminal 2 (for example, behind the front radar).
  • the front radar and the rear radar are, for example, millimeter wave radars.
  • the radar 22 outputs a detection signal related to the distance, relative speed, relative position, direction, and the like to an external object to the control unit 29.
  • the microphone 23 outputs a signal (for example, an audio signal) obtained by collecting sound to the control unit 29.
  • a signal for example, an audio signal
  • the microphone 23 may be a microphone array including a plurality of microphones.
  • the position detection unit 24 includes a positioning signal receiving antenna that receives a positioning signal from a satellite or the like. The position detection unit 24 outputs the received positioning signal to the control unit 29.
  • the 1st portable terminal 2 may acquire the information which shows a present position based on communication with a base station, for example.
  • the vibrator 25 is a vibrator and generates vibrations according to the notification information output from the control unit 29.
  • the speaker 26 converts a signal (for example, an audio signal) output from the control unit 29 into sound.
  • the display unit 27 operates according to notification information output from the control unit 29.
  • the display unit 27 includes, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) that emit three colors of red, green, and blue.
  • the display unit 27 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL (electroluminescence) display device, or an electronic ink display device.
  • the acceleration sensor 28 detects the acceleration in the three directions of the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis of the first mobile terminal 2 and outputs the detected acceleration signal to the control unit 29.
  • the control unit 29 acquires a detection signal output from the radar 22.
  • the control unit 29 acquires an audio signal output from the microphone 23.
  • the control unit 29 acquires the positioning information output from the position detection unit 24.
  • the control unit 29 acquires danger information output from the communication unit 21.
  • the control unit 29 outputs position information based on the positioning information acquired from the position detection unit 24 to the communication unit 21. For example, the control unit 29 determines whether or not a person is included using a known recognition method from the detection signal acquired from the radar 22. When a person is included in the detection signal, the control unit 29 sets the detection signal as the same group pedestrian information or the surrounding pedestrian information, and outputs the same group pedestrian information or the surrounding pedestrian information to the communication unit 21.
  • control part 29 discriminate
  • control part 29 discriminate
  • the control unit 29 acquires information (for example, traffic information, messages, and emergency information) output from the communication unit 21.
  • information from the communication unit 21 is an audio signal
  • the control unit 29 outputs the audio signal to the speaker 26.
  • the control unit 29 outputs the information to at least one of the display unit 27 and the vibrator 25.
  • the control part 29 controls the color or blinking state etc. which are light-emitted according to information, for example.
  • the control unit 29 controls the vibration interval or the strength of vibration according to the information, for example.
  • the control unit 29 generates a voice message based on the danger information, and outputs the generated voice message to the speaker 26. Further, the control unit 29 generates notification information based on the danger information, and outputs the generated notification information to the vibrator 25.
  • the control unit 29 acquires the detection value output from the acceleration sensor 28 and transmits the acquired detection value to the data center 4 through the communication unit 21.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the present embodiment.
  • the second mobile terminal 3 includes a communication unit 31, a microphone 32, an operation unit 33, a display unit 34, a speaker 35, a control unit 36, and a vibrator 37.
  • the communication unit 31 receives the first mobile terminal position information transmitted from the data center 4 and outputs the received first mobile terminal position information to the control unit 36.
  • the communication unit 31 receives the emergency notification or voice message transmitted from the data center 4 and outputs the received emergency notification or voice message to the control unit 36.
  • the microphone 32 outputs a signal (for example, an audio signal) obtained by collecting sound to the control unit 36.
  • the microphone 32 may be a microphone array including a plurality of microphones.
  • the operation unit 33 is a touch panel sensor provided on the display unit 34, for example.
  • the operation unit 33 outputs a signal generated by a user operation to the control unit 36.
  • the display unit 34 displays the first portable terminal position information output from the control unit 36.
  • the display unit 34 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, or an electronic ink display device.
  • the speaker 35 converts a signal (for example, an audio signal) output from the control unit 36 into sound.
  • Vibrator 37 is a vibrator, and generates vibration according to the notification information output from control unit 36.
  • the control unit 36 acquires the first portable terminal position information output from the communication unit 31.
  • the control unit 36 acquires an emergency notification or a voice message output from the communication unit 31.
  • the control unit 36 outputs the acquired first portable terminal position information to the display unit 34.
  • the emergency notification is image information
  • the control unit 36 outputs the emergency information to the display unit 34.
  • the control unit 36 outputs the acquired voice message to the speaker 35.
  • the control unit 36 acquires danger information output from the communication unit 31.
  • the control unit 36 generates a voice message based on the danger information, and outputs the generated voice message to the speaker 35.
  • the control unit 36 generates notification information based on the danger information, and outputs the generated notification information to the vibrator 37.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example in which the data center 4 transmits the first mobile terminal position information according to the present embodiment to the second mobile terminal 3.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 11 The control unit 42 receives position information from the first portable terminal 2 by the communication unit 41 via the network 6.
  • the positional information includes received time information.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 12 The control unit 42 stores the received position information in the storage unit 44.
  • Step S13 The control unit 42 generates the first portable terminal position information using the position information and map information stored in the storage unit 44. Note that the control unit 42 connects the time information included in the position information in chronological order, and generates a movement trajectory of the person who carries the first portable terminal 2. Subsequently, the control unit 42 transmits the first portable terminal position information to the second portable terminal 3 by the communication unit 41 via the network 6.
  • the data center 4 when the data center 4 receives a transmission request for the first mobile terminal position information from the second mobile terminal 3, the data center 4 performs the processing illustrated in FIG.
  • the transmission request for the first mobile terminal position information is transmitted from the control unit 36 via the communication unit 31 in response to an operation on the operation unit 33 of the second mobile terminal 3 by the guardian.
  • the data center 4 may execute the processing shown in FIG. 5 at a preset time, for example.
  • the preset time is, for example, the attendance time and the school leaving time of the mobile person set in accordance with the operation of the guardian on the operation unit 33 of the second mobile terminal 3.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of first mobile terminal position information displayed on the display unit 34 of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the present embodiment.
  • the first mobile terminal position information shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, the first mobile terminal position information when the mobile person leaves school.
  • the first portable terminal position information includes information on the movement locus g11 and the current position g12 of the person who carries the first portable terminal 2.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example in which the data center 4 according to the present embodiment transmits a danger notice to the first mobile terminal 2 and the second mobile terminal 3.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 21 The control unit 42 of the data center 4 accesses the server 5.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 22 The control unit 42 acquires information indicating a dangerous location and suspicious person information from the server 5 by the communication unit 41.
  • the control unit 42 causes the storage unit 44 to store the acquired information indicating the dangerous location and the suspicious person information.
  • the dangerous part includes, for example, a predetermined range including a position (latitude and longitude) where suspicious person information is obtained, or a range such as an address where suspicious person information is obtained. Note that the range may be set by the control unit 42.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 23 The control unit 42 acquires position information from the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the location information may be transmitted by the first mobile terminal 2 based on a request from the data center 4 or may be transmitted by the first mobile terminal 2 at a predetermined cycle.
  • the control unit 42 stores the acquired position information in the storage unit 44.
  • Step S24 The control unit 42 calculates the distance between the dangerous location and the current position of the carrier based on the map information stored in the storage unit 44, the information indicating the dangerous location, and the location information.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 25 The control unit 42 determines whether the calculated distance is less than a predetermined value stored in the storage unit 44. When it is determined that the distance is less than the predetermined value (step S25; YES), the control unit 42 proceeds to the process of step S26. When it is determined that the distance is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S25; NO), the control unit 42 returns to the process of step S21.
  • Step S26 The control unit 42 generates danger information.
  • the control unit 42 notifies the danger by transmitting the generated danger information to the second portable terminal 3 through the communication unit 41.
  • the danger information is a notification sound
  • the control unit 42 increases the notification sound as the first portable terminal 2 approaches the dangerous place.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 27 The control unit 42 notifies the danger by transmitting the generated danger information to the first mobile terminal 2 through the communication unit 41.
  • the danger information is a notification sound
  • the control unit 42 increases the notification sound as the first portable terminal 2 approaches the dangerous place.
  • the guardian may set the dangerous part by operating the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3, and the control unit 42 of the data center 4 may acquire the set information.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example when the first portable terminal 2 according to the present embodiment receives the danger information.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 31 The control unit 29 of the first mobile terminal 2 receives the danger information transmitted by the data center 4 by the communication unit 21.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 32 The control unit 29 generates a voice message informing the danger based on the danger information, and reproduces the generated voice message from the speaker 26. Moreover, the control part 29 produces
  • the control unit 29 outputs a predetermined voltage to the speaker 26 based on the danger information. Thereby, the control part 29 performs the audio
  • the control unit 29 increases the volume as the distance between the dangerous location and the current position of the wearer decreases.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 33 The control unit 29 determines whether or not it is a vibrator mode in which sound output from the speaker 26 is prohibited.
  • the control unit 29 may set the vibrator mode in accordance with, for example, an operation on an operation unit (not shown) provided in the first mobile terminal 2 or in response to an instruction from the second mobile terminal 3. May be executed.
  • the control unit 29 proceeds to the process of step S34.
  • the control part 29 returns a process to step S31, when it determines with it not being vibrator mode (step S33; NO). Note that, in the vibrator mode, the control unit 29 may not perform the process of step S32 or may blink the display unit 27 instead of the process of step S32.
  • Step S34 The control unit 29 drives the vibrator 25 based on the danger information.
  • the control part 29 may enlarge the amplitude of the vibration of the vibrator 25, or may shorten the space
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example when the second portable terminal 3 according to the present embodiment receives the danger information.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 41 The control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 receives the danger information transmitted from the data center 4 by the communication unit 31.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 42 The control unit 36 generates a voice message informing the danger based on the danger information, and reproduces the generated voice message from the speaker 35. Or the control part 36 produces
  • the control unit 36 outputs a predetermined voltage to the speaker 35 based on the danger information. Thereby, the control part 36 performs the audio
  • the control unit 36 increases the volume as the distance between the dangerous place and the current position of the wearer decreases.
  • Step S43 The control unit 36 determines whether or not the vibrator mode is set.
  • the control unit 36 sets the vibrator mode according to the result of operating the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3.
  • step S43; YES the control unit 36 proceeds to the process of step S44.
  • step S43; NO the control unit 36 proceeds to the process of step S45. Note that, in the vibrator mode, the control unit 36 may not perform the process of step S42, or may blink the display unit 34 instead of the process of step S42.
  • Step S44 The controller 36 drives the vibrator 37 based on the danger information.
  • the control unit 36 may increase the vibration amplitude of the vibrator 37 or shorten the vibration interval as the distance between the dangerous place and the current position of the wearer becomes shorter.
  • Step S45 The control unit 36 transmits a transmission request for the first portable terminal position information to the data center 4 through the communication unit 31 based on the result of the guardian operating the operation unit 33. Based on the received transmission request, the control unit 42 of the data center 4 attaches a warning image notifying the danger to the first portable terminal position information and transmits the warning image to the second portable terminal 3 by the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 receives the first portable terminal position information transmitted from the data center 4 by the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 causes the display unit 34 to display the received first portable terminal position information.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of first mobile terminal position information including a warning image displayed on the display unit 34 of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the present embodiment.
  • the first mobile terminal position information shown in FIG. 10 is, for example, the first mobile terminal position information when the mobile person leaves school.
  • the first portable terminal position information includes information on the movement locus g11 and the current position g12 of the person carrying the first portable terminal 2, an image g21 indicating a dangerous place, and a warning image g22.
  • the current position of the first mobile terminal 2 possessed by the mobile phone is within the danger area, so a predetermined wording (for example, “You are in the danger area. Please be careful! ])
  • Warning image g22 is superimposed or combined with other information and displayed.
  • the warning image may be generated based on the warning information received by the control unit 36.
  • the control unit 29 of the first portable terminal 2 may transmit the detection signal acquired from the radar 22 to the data center 4 by the communication unit 21 as the same group pedestrian information, surrounding pedestrian information, or vehicle information.
  • control unit 42 of the data center 4 uses the communication unit 41 to transmit the traffic information to the first part when the owner of the first mobile terminal 2 approaches a place with a large traffic volume based on, for example, information received from the server 5. You may transmit to the portable terminal 2.
  • the traffic information may be an audio signal.
  • the control unit 29 of the first mobile terminal 2 reproduces the received traffic information. Thereby, the portable person who possesses the 1st portable terminal 2 can know that he approached the location with much traffic.
  • the control part 42 of the data center 4 may transmit emergency information to the 1st portable terminal 2 and the 2nd portable terminal 3 based on the information received from the server 5, for example.
  • the emergency information is information calling for evacuation when, for example, a disaster or accident occurs.
  • the location information acquired by the first portable terminal 2 carried by the carrier or attached to the bag or the like is collected in the data center 4 and the second portable terminal 3 possessed by the guardian.
  • suspicious person information is collected from the administrative or school server 5 to the data center 4.
  • the data center 4 and the second portable The danger information is transmitted to the guardian who owns the terminal 3.
  • the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 when the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 is approaching a dangerous place, the carrier (for example, children, such as a child) of the 1st portable terminal 2, or the 2nd portable terminal 3 A danger notice can be sent to the owner (eg, a guardian, etc.).
  • the owner eg, a guardian, etc.
  • an alarm sound etc. are enlarged as the 1st portable terminal 2 approaches a dangerous location. Thereby, according to this embodiment, it can notify more accurately that the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 is approaching a dangerous place.
  • the second mobile terminal 3 acquires the movement locus of the first mobile terminal 2. Thereby, according to this embodiment, the holder of the 2nd portable terminal 3 can grasp
  • trajectory for example, a return route from a school to a home etc.
  • the data center 4A determines whether or not a predetermined operation to be performed at a predetermined position such as a school route is performed based on the information received from the first mobile terminal 2, and the determination result is the second mobile phone.
  • a predetermined position such as a school route
  • the predetermined position may be information on a position including the above-described dangerous place.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a main operation example of the information communication system 1A according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • Symbol g100 is a diagram illustrating an example of an interaction between the first portable terminal 2 and a carrier (for example, a child such as a child) when returning home.
  • reference sign g100 reference sign g101 is a child's utterance
  • reference sign g102 is the first mobile terminal 2's utterance.
  • Symbol g110 is a diagram showing an example of dialogue between the child and the guardian when returning home.
  • reference sign g111 is the utterance of the guardian
  • reference sign g112 is the utterance of the child
  • reference sign g113 is the utterance of the first portable terminal 2.
  • the symbol g120 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the second portable terminal 3.
  • the displayed image is an image received from the data center 4.
  • a symbol g121 is an image received from the data center 4.
  • the image g121 includes a score image g122, a child movement trajectory image g122, and motion confirmation result images g123 and g124 at the confirmation location.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an information communication system 1A according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • the information communication system 1 ⁇ / b> A includes a first mobile terminal 2, a second mobile terminal 3, a data center 4 ⁇ / b> A (center), and a server 5.
  • the first mobile terminal 2, the second mobile terminal 3, the data center 4 ⁇ / b> A, and the server 5 are connected to each other via a network 6.
  • description is abbreviate
  • the difference between the information communication system 1 and the modified information communication system 1A is a data center 4A.
  • the data center 4A includes a communication unit 41, a control unit 42A, a model storage unit 43, a storage unit 44A, a voice recognition model storage unit 45, a voice recognition unit 46, and a scenario storage unit 47.
  • the voice recognition model storage unit 45 stores, for example, an acoustic model, a language model, a word dictionary, and the like.
  • the acoustic model is a model based on the feature amount of sound
  • the language model is a model of information on words and how to arrange them.
  • the word dictionary is a dictionary with a large number of vocabularies, for example, a large vocabulary word dictionary.
  • the voice recognition unit 46 detects the voice signal in the utterance section with respect to the voice signal output from the control unit 42A. For the detection of the utterance section, for example, an audio signal having a predetermined threshold value or more is detected as the utterance section. Note that the speech recognition unit 46 may perform detection of the utterance section using another known method. The speech recognition unit 46 performs speech recognition on the detected speech signal in the utterance section with reference to the speech recognition model storage unit 45 using a known method. Note that the voice recognition unit 46 performs voice recognition using, for example, a technique disclosed in JP-A-2015-64554. The speech recognition unit 46 converts the recognized recognition result into text with reference to the speech recognition model storage unit 45.
  • the speech recognition unit 46 performs morphological analysis and dependency analysis on the text information with reference to the speech recognition model storage unit 45.
  • dependency analysis for example, SVM (Support Vector Machines) is used in the shift-reduce method, the spanning tree method, and the chunk identification stage application method.
  • the voice recognition unit 46 outputs the analysis result to the control unit 42A.
  • the scenario storage unit 47 stores a dialogue performed in an environment where the first mobile terminal 2 is used, for example, in a text format.
  • the control unit 42A performs the following processing in addition to the processing performed by the control unit 42.
  • the control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A receives the detection signal of the radar 22 received by the communication unit 41 from the first portable terminal 2 and the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 received by the communication unit 41 from the first portable terminal 2.
  • the control unit 42A determines whether or not a predetermined operation is performed at the set position based on at least one of the received detection signal of the radar 22 and the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28.
  • the control unit 42A obtains, for example, a score when returning home based on the determined result.
  • the control unit 42A stores the obtained score in the storage unit 44A.
  • the control unit 42A generates an image including a score image and an image indicating the determined result in the image of the child's movement trajectory.
  • the control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A transmits the generated image to the second portable terminal 3.
  • a method for determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed and how to obtain a score will be described later.
  • the control unit 42A acquires the analysis result output by the voice recognition unit 46. Based on the analysis result, the control unit 42A refers to the scenario storage unit 47 and selects a response to the audio signal received from the first portable terminal 2.
  • the control unit 42A converts the selected response into an audio signal by, for example, a formant synthesis method, and transmits the converted audio signal to the first portable terminal 2 by the communication unit 41.
  • storage parts associate and store a predetermined operation
  • the storage unit 44A stores, for example, the total score when returning home.
  • the storage unit 44 stores a threshold value used when determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed.
  • the storage unit 44 ⁇ / b> A stores face model data and arm model data used for detection of the detection signal of the radar 22.
  • the guardian may operate the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3 to set the school route in advance.
  • the control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 may transmit information indicating the school route to the data center 4A by the communication unit 31.
  • the guardian may operate the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3 to set a predetermined position where the predetermined operation should be performed.
  • the control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 may transmit information indicating the predetermined position to the data center 4A by the communication unit 31.
  • the guardian may set the predetermined operation by operating the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3.
  • control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 may transmit information indicating a predetermined operation performed at a predetermined position to the data center 4A by the communication unit 31.
  • the data center 4A may acquire a dangerous spot from the server 5 and set the acquired dangerous spot at a predetermined position. Then, a predetermined operation may be set according to the type of the predetermined position.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the predetermined position, the predetermined operation, and the score according to the first modification example of the embodiment.
  • the example shown in FIG. 13 is a predetermined position on the return route (return home route), a predetermined action, and a part of the score, and the total score is set to 100 points on the return route.
  • the predetermined locations are the A intersection, the B intersection, and the C intersection.
  • the predetermined operation is, for example, temporary stop and left / right confirmation at the A intersection.
  • the score is 10 for the temporary stop and 10 for the left / right confirmation at the A intersection, for example.
  • the control unit 42A sets the score to 10 when the pause operation is performed at the A intersection, and sets the score to 0 when the operation is not performed. Then, the total score from school to home is obtained, and the obtained total score is stored in the storage unit 44A. Note that the control unit 42A may obtain a total score by subtracting a score of a predetermined action that has not been performed from 100 points.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example performed by the data center 4A according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • the control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A determines whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed based on the detection signal of the radar 22.
  • Step S51 The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the position information transmitted by the first mobile terminal 2.
  • Step S52 The control unit 42A receives the detection signal of the radar 22 transmitted from the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the 1st portable terminal 2 transmits a positional information and a detection signal to the data center 4A for every predetermined period.
  • Step S53 When the position is a predetermined location, the control unit 42A performs an operation analysis by determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed based on the received detection signal.
  • Step S54 The control unit 42A performs a scoring process based on the result of the operation analysis and the information stored in the storage unit 44A.
  • the scoring process is, for example, a point addition or deduction process.
  • Step S55 The control unit 42A determines whether a score transmission request is received from the second portable terminal 3. When it is determined that the request has been received from the second portable terminal 3 (step S55; YES), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request is not received from the second portable terminal 3 (step S55; NO), the control unit 42A returns the process to step S51.
  • Step S56 The control unit 42A generates an image including the image of the score and the image indicating the determination result in the image of the child's movement trajectory.
  • the control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A transmits the generated image to the second mobile terminal 3.
  • the data center 4 ⁇ / b> A has described the example in which the information including the score is transmitted when it is determined that the request is received from the second mobile terminal 3, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the data center 4A may transmit information including a score at a time set by a guardian or every predetermined period.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example performed by the second mobile terminal 3 according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • the control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 receives information including the score transmitted by the data center 4A.
  • the control unit 36 causes the display unit 34 to display information including the received score.
  • the process shown in FIG. 15 may be executed at a time set by the guardian or at a predetermined cycle when a request is transmitted from the second portable terminal 3.
  • FIG. 16 is an image example of information including a score displayed on the display unit 34 of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • the image g200 is an image displayed on the display unit 34.
  • a symbol g201 indicates a school.
  • a symbol g202 indicates a home.
  • Reference numeral g203 is an image showing the movement trajectory of the child.
  • Reference numerals g211, g212, and g213 indicate predetermined locations.
  • a symbol g221 represents a determination result of the predetermined operation in the symbol g211.
  • the circles indicate that a predetermined operation has been performed.
  • a symbol g222 represents a determination result of the predetermined operation in the symbol g212.
  • a symbol g223 represents a determination result of the predetermined operation in the symbol g213. Note that a cross indicates that a predetermined operation is not performed.
  • a symbol g230 is an image representing the total score.
  • the symbols g221 and g222 when the predetermined operation is performed may be displayed in blue, for example, and the symbol g223 when the predetermined operation is not performed may be displayed in red, for example.
  • Such an image is generated by the control unit 42A of the data center 4A.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example of an operation analysis method for pause at a predetermined position according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • the control unit 42A starts the following process after initializing the counter value T to zero. Further, the control unit 42A performs the following processing at a predetermined position.
  • Step S71 The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the position information from the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the control unit 42A stores the received position information in the storage unit 44 in association with the received time information.
  • Step S72 The control unit 42A compares the previous position (position information closest to the current time) stored in the storage unit 44A with the received position information, and determines whether or not the position is the same as the previous time. Is determined.
  • the control unit 42A determines that the position is the same as the previous position (step S72; YES)
  • the control unit 42A proceeds to the process of step S73.
  • the control unit 42A determines that the position is not the same as the previous position (step S72; NO)
  • the process proceeds to step S74.
  • Step S73 The control unit 42A adds 1 to the counter value T, and the process proceeds to step S75.
  • Step S74 The control unit 42A assigns 0 to the counter value T, and returns the process to step S71.
  • Step S75 The control unit 42A determines whether or not the counter value T is larger than a threshold value used when determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed.
  • the control unit 42A determines that the counter value T is larger than the threshold value (step S75; YES)
  • the control unit 42A advances the process to step S76.
  • the control unit 42A determines that the counter value T is equal to or less than the threshold value (step S75; NO)
  • the control unit 42A returns the process to step S71.
  • Step S76 The control unit 42A determines that the child carrying the first mobile terminal 2 has paused at a predetermined position.
  • control unit 42A may perform the operation analysis of the suspension based on the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 of the first portable terminal 2. In this case, in step S71, the control unit 42A receives the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28. In step S72, the control unit 42A may determine that the position is the same when the difference between the previous detection value and the current detection value is within a predetermined range including zero. The control unit 42A determines whether or not the child has performed a predetermined operation based on at least one of the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 and other information (for example, a detection signal output by the radar 22). It may be detected.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example of the motion analysis method for checking the left and right at a predetermined position according to the first modification of the embodiment. Note that the control unit 42A performs the following processing at a predetermined position.
  • Step S81 The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the detection signal output from the radar 22 from the first portable terminal 2.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 82 The control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A detects the face portion of the person who carries the first portable terminal 2 from the received detection signal by a known method. Subsequently, the control unit 42A stores the detected face detection signal in the storage unit 44A in association with the acquired time information.
  • Step S83 The control unit 42A compares the acquired face detection signal with the previous face detection signal based on the face detection signal stored in the storage unit 44A. As a result of the comparison, the control unit 42A determines whether or not the face portion is moving left and right. When the control unit 42A determines that the face part is moving left and right (step S83; YES), the process proceeds to step S84. On the other hand, when the control unit 42A determines that the face portion has not moved left and right (step S83; NO), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S85.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 84 The control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A determines that the carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 has confirmed left and right (right and left confirmation OK).
  • Step S85 42 A of control parts discriminate
  • the control unit 42A determines whether or not the face has moved to the left or right when the left / right value of the detected value changes by a predetermined value or more based on the detected value of the acceleration sensor 28. May be determined. Note that the control unit 42A determines whether or not the user has performed a predetermined operation based on at least one of a detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 and other information (for example, a detection signal output by the radar 22). May be detected.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an example of a processing procedure of an operation analysis method for a hand raising operation at a predetermined position according to the first modification of the embodiment. Note that the control unit 42A performs the following processing at a predetermined position.
  • Step S91 The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the detection signal output from the radar 22 from the first portable terminal 2.
  • Step S ⁇ b> 92 The control unit 42 ⁇ / b> A detects the arm portion of the holder of the first portable terminal 2 from the received detection signal by a known method.
  • the control unit 42A stores the detected arm detection signal in the storage unit 44A in association with the acquired time information.
  • Step S93 The control unit 42A determines whether or not the arm is raised depending on whether or not the arm portion has been detected. When it is determined that the arm is raised (step S93; YES), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S94. On the other hand, when it is determined that the arm is not raised (the arm cannot be detected) (step S93; NO), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S95.
  • Step S94 42 A of control parts discriminate
  • Step S95 42 A of control parts discriminate
  • the guardian grasps the skill of the child. be able to. According to the first modification of the embodiment, the guardian and the child can communicate with each other while viewing the information displayed on the second mobile terminal 3, thereby increasing the chance of communication between the guardian and the child. At the same time, safety awareness is improved.
  • the control unit 29 of the first portable terminal 2 transmits this audio signal picked up by the microphone 23 to the data center 4 ⁇ / b> A through the communication unit 21.
  • the voice recognition unit 46 of the data center 4A performs voice recognition processing on the received voice signal.
  • the control unit 42A generates a reply voice signal based on the result of the voice recognition process, and transmits the generated voice signal to the first portable terminal 2 by the communication unit 41.
  • the control unit 29 of the first portable terminal 2 speaks by reproducing “Return!” Received from the data center 4A.
  • the data center 4A receives the voice signal that the child uttered “What is today's score?”, And the control unit 42A receives the voice recognition result and the information stored in the scenario storage unit 47 and the storage unit 44. Based on this, a “90 points” audio signal as a response is generated.
  • the control unit 42A transmits an audio signal as a response to the first portable terminal 2 through the communication unit 41. As a result, the control unit 29 of the first mobile terminal 2 utters “90 points” received from the data center 4A.
  • the audio signal collected by the first portable terminal 2 is transmitted to the data center 4A, and the response of the audio signal received by the data center 4A is transmitted to the first portable terminal 2.
  • the audio signal transmitted from the data center 4A to the first mobile terminal 2 is “I did well!” When the score is 70 or more, for example, and “I did not pause when the score is 50 or less. Tomorrow. "Let's pause.”
  • the guardian and the child have a conversation to confirm the traffic safety point while viewing the image displayed on the second portable terminal 3.
  • the first portable terminal 2 or the second portable terminal 3 transmits the collected audio signal to the data center 4A.
  • the data center 4 ⁇ / b> A transmits an audio signal of advice to the first mobile terminal 2 based on the result of the voice recognition. As a result, the first portable terminal 2 reproduces the advice audio signal “Please pause only because the pause is OK!”.
  • the data center 4 ⁇ / b> A may also transmit such advice audio signals to the second portable terminal 3.
  • the voice signal picked up by the first portable terminal 2 or the second portable terminal 3 is transmitted to the data center 4A, and the response of the voice signal received by the data center 4A is sent to the first portable terminal. 2 to send.
  • communication can be performed between the guardian, the child, and the robot that is the first portable terminal 2, and the child carrying the first portable terminal 2 can be continuously provided for traffic safety education. it can.
  • a child carries the first portable terminal 2
  • a mobile person, a pedestrian, or an elderly person may carry the first portable terminal 2.
  • the geographical position may be information on a position including the above-described dangerous place and a predetermined position.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of an information communication system 1B according to a second modification of the embodiment.
  • the information communication system 1 ⁇ / b> B includes a first mobile terminal 2, a second mobile terminal 3, a data center 4 ⁇ / b> B, and a server 5.
  • the data center 4B includes a communication unit 41, a control unit 42B, a model storage unit 43, a storage unit 44B, a voice recognition model storage unit 45, a voice recognition unit 46, and a scenario storage unit 47.
  • the storage unit 44B includes, for example, an HDD, a flash memory, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), or a RAM (Random Access Memory).
  • the storage unit 44B stores, for example, map information, danger information, suspicious person information, and geographical position information.
  • the suspicious person information includes a suspicious person pattern in addition to the position information and time at which the suspicious person appears.
  • the suspicious person pattern is information indicating the characteristics of the behavior and behavior of the suspicious person. Details of the geographical location information will be described later.
  • the control unit 42B includes, for example, a notification unit 421 as a functional unit.
  • the control unit 42B is realized by, for example, a hardware processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) executing a program (software) stored in the storage unit 44B.
  • a hardware processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) executing a program (software) stored in the storage unit 44B.
  • Some or all of these components include hardware (circuitry) such as LSI (Large Scale Integration), ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array), and GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). Part (including circuit)), or may be realized by cooperation of software and hardware.
  • the notification unit 421 informs the carrier (for example, a child such as a child) who holds the first mobile terminal 2 about the approach of the geographical position.
  • the geographical position information is information indicating the geographical position.
  • the geographical position is a position on a route through which the carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 passes, for example, a position where there is a possibility of danger to children.
  • the geographical position includes, for example, an intersection on a route, a position on a sidewalk separated from a roadway, and the vicinity of a dangerous structure.
  • the geographical position includes a point (for example, a safety confirmation point) where execution of a predetermined operation such as a stop operation, a left / right confirmation operation, and a hand raising operation is required.
  • a point for example, a safety confirmation point
  • execution of a predetermined operation such as a stop operation, a left / right confirmation operation, and a hand raising operation is required.
  • the geographical position information includes a geographical position on a route where a child walks when going to and from school.
  • the first portable terminal 2 identifies the position of the first portable terminal 2 (that is, the position of the child) based on the positioning signal received from the satellite or the like by the position detection unit 24, and position information indicating the identified position. Is transmitted to the data center 4B.
  • the information communication system 1B may adopt a method other than the position detection unit 24 as long as it can identify the position of the child.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 may be connected to the first mobile terminal 2 by a method such as BLE (Bluetooth (registered trademark) Low Energy), PDR (Pedestrian® Dead® Reckoning), IMES (Indoor Messaging System), SLAM (Simultaneous Localization and Mapping).
  • the position of may be specified.
  • the first portable terminal 2 may specify the position of the first portable terminal 2 based on the peripheral information detected by the radar 22.
  • the information communication system 1B may acquire the position of the first mobile terminal 2 from another system that specifies the position of the first mobile terminal 2, for example.
  • another system includes a detection device installed at a geographical position, and the detection device detects the first mobile terminal 2 present in the vicinity of the own device, thereby specifying the position of the first mobile terminal 2. May be.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the first mobile terminal 2 A notification function provided is controlled to notify the child of the approach of the geographical position.
  • the notification function with which the 1st portable terminal 2 is provided is vibrator 25, speaker 26, etc., for example.
  • reporting part 421 of the data center 4B transmits the control signal of the vibrator 25 to the 1st portable terminal 2, and the 1st portable terminal 2 operates (vibrates) the vibrator 25 based on the said control signal.
  • the notification unit 421 transmits a control signal for the vibrator 25 to the first mobile terminal 2, and the notification unit oscillates the vibrator 25 based on the control signal. It also describes that 421 vibrates the vibrator 25.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically illustrating the start timing of notification according to the second modification of the embodiment.
  • the child C1 who is the carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 goes straight in the direction of the intersection and walks along a route that turns right at the intersection (route rt shown in the drawing).
  • the geographical position PT1 is set in advance at the position of the intersection.
  • the geographical position PT1 is preferably set on a route rt on which the child C1 walks rather than the center of the intersection. For example, in a road in which a roadway and a sidewalk are divided, the route rt is a sidewalk, and the geographical position PT1 is set on the sidewalk (more specifically, the boundary between the sidewalk and the roadway).
  • the notification unit 421 operates the vibrator 25 when the child C1 approaches a position (that is, a predetermined range ARP illustrated) that is a predetermined distance (a first predetermined distance dt1 illustrated) from the geographical position PT1.
  • the first predetermined distance dt1 is a distance of about several meters, for example.
  • the notification unit 421 may change the strength of notification (for example, the strength of vibration) according to the distance to the geographical position PT1.
  • the child C1 walks while paying attention to the surroundings by being notified of the geographical position PT1 (that is, the intersection) by the vibrator 25. For this reason, the information communication system 1B can suppress contact between the child C1 and the vehicle m traveling in the traveling direction of the child C1.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing of the notification unit 421 according to the second modification of the embodiment.
  • the notification unit 421 executes the process shown in FIG. 22 at predetermined time intervals.
  • reporting part 421 acquires the positional information which shows the position of the child C1 from the 1st portable terminal 2 (step S100).
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1 (step S102). When the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is not less than the first predetermined distance dt1, the notification unit 421 ends the process.
  • the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S104.
  • the notification unit 421 performs a geographical position approach notification process for notifying the child C1 of the approach of the geographical position PT1 (step S104), and ends the process.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the geographical location approach notification process in step S104 shown in FIG.
  • reporting part 421 starts the alerting
  • the notification unit 421 starts the vibration of the vibrator 25.
  • reporting part 421 acquires the position of the child C1 by the position detection part 24 (step S202).
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the child C1 is approaching the geographical position PT1 based on the position of the child C1 acquired in step S100 and the position of the child C1 acquired in step S202 ( Step S204).
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 is approaching the geographical position PT1 (YES in step S204)
  • the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S206.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 has not approached the geographical position PT1 (NO side of step S204)
  • the notification unit 421 advances the processing to step S208.
  • reporting part 421 increases the alerting
  • Increasing the notification amount is, for example, at least one of increasing the vibration of the vibrator 25 and increasing the frequency of vibration.
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the child C1 is away from the geographical position PT1 (step S208). When the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 is moving away from the geographical position PT1 (YES in step S208), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S210. On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 has not approached or moved away from the geographical position PT1 (NO in step S208), the notification amount of the vibrator 25 is not changed, and the process proceeds to step S212. . And the alerting
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is equal to or greater than the first predetermined distance dt1 (step S212). While the notification unit 421 determines that the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1 (NO in step S212, that is, until the child C1 goes out of the predetermined range ARP). The process returns to step S204. The notification unit 421 adjusts the notification amount by repeating the processing from steps S204 to S210.
  • step S212 when the notification unit 421 determines that the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is equal to or greater than the first predetermined distance dt1 (YES side of step S212), the process proceeds to step S214. And the alerting
  • the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 may be a distance along the route rt of the child C1.
  • the notification unit 421 suppresses the notification for a long time by performing notification based on the distance to the geographical position PT1 along the route rt of the child C1, and the child C1 gets used to the notification state. Can be suppressed.
  • the information communication system 1B according to the second modification of the embodiment can more appropriately notify the child C1 of the approach of the geographical position.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the first mobile terminal 2B according to the third modification of the embodiment.
  • the first mobile terminal 2B includes a communication unit 21, a radar 22, a microphone 23, a position detection unit 24, a vibrator 25, a speaker 26, a display unit 27, an acceleration sensor 28, and the like. And a control unit 29B.
  • the control unit 29B includes, for example, an approach determination unit 291 as a functional unit in addition to the configuration included in the control unit 29.
  • the control unit 29B is realized, for example, when a hardware processor such as a CPU executes a program (software) stored in a storage unit (not shown). Some or all of these components may be realized by hardware (including a circuit unit) such as LSI, ASIC, FPGA, or GPU, or by cooperation of software and hardware. Also good.
  • the approach determination unit 291 determines, for example, whether or not an object existing around the mobile person has approached the mobile person based on the detection result of the detection function provided in the first mobile terminal 2B.
  • the detection function provided in the first mobile terminal 2B is the radar 22 will be described.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram schematically illustrating the start timing of notification according to the third modification of the embodiment.
  • the radar 22 included in the first mobile terminal 2B is configured to be able to detect the surroundings of the child C1, for example.
  • the radar 22 is configured by, for example, a plurality of (two in the drawing) millimeter wave radars, and is provided in different directions so that the surroundings of the first portable terminal 2B (that is, the surroundings of the child C1) can be detected. .
  • the front radar and the rear radar included in the radar 22 detect different ranges (a front detection range AF and a rear detection range AR shown in the drawing).
  • the radar 22 When the radar 22 is set to be able to detect the entire area of the child C1 (for example, a range of 360 degrees around the vertical axis), the front detection range AF and the rear detection range AR may overlap each other. Good.
  • the radar 22 detects the surroundings of the user at predetermined time intervals and generates a detection signal.
  • the radar 22 may include one or a plurality of millimeter wave radars as long as it can detect the surroundings of the child C1.
  • the first mobile terminal 2B may include a device other than the radar 22 as a configuration for detecting the surrounding environment of the user.
  • the first portable terminal 2 ⁇ / b> B may include a detection device that performs remote detection, such as a camera, a LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging or Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging), or an infrared sensor, instead of the radar 22.
  • the first mobile terminal 2 ⁇ / b> B may include one or a plurality of cameras instead of the radar 22.
  • the three cameras provided in the first portable terminal 2B capture images in different ranges (imaging ranges AR1 to AR3 shown).
  • the imaging ranges AR1 to AR3 of the three cameras may overlap each other.
  • the three cameras may capture the periphery of the user at predetermined time intervals and generate captured images (for example, still images or moving images).
  • the approach determination unit 291 moves the object to a position (that is, a predetermined range ARC shown in the drawing) that is a predetermined distance (a second predetermined distance dt2 shown in the drawing) from the position of the child C1.
  • a predetermined range ARC shown in the drawing
  • a second predetermined distance dt2 is a distance of about several meters.
  • the notification unit 421 of the data center 4B controls the notification function provided in the first mobile terminal 2B when an object is approaching the child C1, based on the detection signal of the radar 22 received from the first mobile terminal 2B. Inform child C1 of the approach of the object.
  • the notification unit 421 notifies the child C1 of the approach of the vehicle m and the approach of the suspicious person among the objects approaching the child C1.
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing of the approach determination unit 291 and the notification unit 421 according to the third modification example of the embodiment.
  • the approach determination unit 291 acquires the detection signal output by the radar 22 (step S300).
  • the approach determination unit 291 determines whether or not the distance from the child C1 to the detected object is less than the second predetermined distance dt2 based on the acquired detection signal (step S302).
  • the approach determination unit 291 returns the process to step S300 and waits.
  • step S304 when the approach determination unit 291 determines that the distance from the child C1 to the detected object is less than the second predetermined distance dt2 (YES side of step S302), the process proceeds to step S304. And the alerting
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the object approach notification process in step S304 shown in FIG.
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the size of the object indicated in the detection signal acquired in step S300 is greater than or equal to a predetermined size (step S400).
  • the predetermined size is, for example, a general appropriate vehicle size.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the size of the object indicated by the detection signal is equal to or larger than the predetermined size (YES side of step S400)
  • the process proceeds to step S402.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the size of the object is not equal to or larger than the predetermined size
  • the notification unit 421 advances the processing to step S410.
  • reporting part 421 determines with an object being the vehicle m (step S402).
  • the notification unit 421 acquires a detection signal output after the detection signal acquired in step S300 (step S404).
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the speed of the vehicle m is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed based on the detection signal acquired in step S300 and the detection signal acquired in step S404 (step S406). ).
  • the predetermined speed is, for example, about several to several tens km / h.
  • the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S408.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the speed of the vehicle m is equal to or higher than the predetermined speed (YES side of step S406), the process proceeds to step S412.
  • step S408 determines whether the vehicle m finished passing the vicinity of the child C1 (step S408).
  • the notification unit 421 estimates that there is no danger to the child C1 and starts to notify the child C1 of the approach of the vehicle m. The process ends.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the vehicle m has not passed through the vicinity of the child C1 (NO side of step S408), the notification unit 421 returns the process to step S404.
  • the notification unit 421 estimates that the child C1 is not dangerous even if approaching. , Do not start notification.
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the movement pattern of the object matches the suspicious person's pattern (step S410).
  • the suspicious person's pattern is, for example, a pattern in which a specific object is encountered a predetermined number of times or more during a unit period related to the movement of the child C1 (for example, when attending school or leaving school on an appropriate day).
  • the suspicious person's pattern is a pattern in which an object reciprocates along a path that matches the movement path of the child C1 during a unit period related to the movement of the child C1, for example.
  • the suspicious person's pattern is, for example, a pattern in which the feature of the object matches the suspicious person's feature of the suspicious person information.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the movement pattern of the object does not match the pattern of the suspicious person (NO side of step S410)
  • the notification unit 421 estimates that the object is not a suspicious person and starts notification that notifies the child C1 of the approach of the object. Without processing, the process is terminated.
  • the notification unit 421 determines that the movement pattern of the object matches the suspicious person's pattern (YES in step S410, that is, the object is a suspicious person)
  • the notification unit 421 advances the processing to step S412. And the alerting
  • reporting part 421 acquires the detection signal output after the detection signal acquired in step S300 (step S414).
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether the vehicle m or the suspicious person is approaching the child C1 based on the detection signal acquired in Step S300 and the detection signal acquired in Step S414 (Step S414). S416). Informing part 421 advances processing to Step S418, when vehicle m or a suspicious person is approaching child C1 (YES side of Step S410). On the other hand, when the vehicle m or the suspicious person is not approaching the child C1 (NO side of step S410), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S420.
  • the notification unit 421 increases the notification amount (step S418) and returns the process to step S416. Further, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the vehicle m or the suspicious person has passed near the child C1 (step S420). When the notification unit 421 determines that the vehicle m or the suspicious person has not passed near the child C1 (NO side of step S420), the notification unit 421 returns the process to step S416 and repeats the processes of steps S416 to S418. On the other hand, when the vehicle m or the suspicious person has passed the vicinity of the child C1 (YES side of step S420), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S422. The notification unit 421 stops the notification (step S422).
  • the information communication system 1B can more appropriately notify the child C1 of the approach of the vehicle or the suspicious person.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the first mobile terminal 2C according to the fourth modification example of the embodiment.
  • the information communication system 1B according to the fourth modification of the embodiment includes a first mobile terminal 2C instead of the first mobile terminal 2B or in addition to the first mobile terminal 2B.
  • the first mobile terminal 2C includes a communication unit 21, a radar 22, a microphone 23, a position detection unit 24, a vibrator 25, a speaker 26, a display unit 27, an acceleration sensor 28, and the like.
  • a control unit 29C. 29 C of control parts are provided with the approach determination part 291 and the action recognition part 292 as a function part in addition to the structure with which the control part 29 is provided, for example.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes whether or not the wearer has performed a predetermined motion based on the detection result of the detection function (radar 22 in this example) included in the first mobile terminal 2C.
  • the predetermined operation is an operation that is preferably performed by the wearer at the geographical location.
  • the predetermined operation is, for example, a stop operation that stops at a geographical position.
  • the predetermined operation is, for example, a left / right confirmation operation for confirming left / right at a geographical position.
  • the predetermined operation is, for example, a hand raising operation at a geographical position.
  • the detection range of the radar 22 includes the movable range of the portable person's head and the movable range of the portable person's hand.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes a predetermined motion performed by the carrier based on the detection signal output by the radar 22, and transmits information indicating the recognized predetermined motion to the data center 4B.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically illustrating timing for performing recognition processing of a predetermined action according to the fourth modification example of the embodiment.
  • the first mobile terminal 2C starts notification by the vibrator 25 at a position where the distance to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1 (the position of “child C1 at time t” shown in the figure). To do.
  • the child C1 performs a stop operation that stops at the geographical position PT1.
  • processing when the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes various predetermined motions will be described.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 transmits the position information acquired by the position detection unit 24 to the data center 4B.
  • the data center 4B refers to the geographical position information stored in the storage unit 44B, and specifies the geographical position PT1 existing in the vicinity of the position of the child C1 indicated by the position information.
  • the data center 4B transmits information indicating the identified geographical position PT1 to the first mobile terminal 2C.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 determines whether or not the position of the child C1 specified by the position detection unit 24 is the geographical position PT1. Further, based on the detection signal output by the radar 22, the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes that the child C1 is stopped when the surrounding environment acquired by the detection signal has not changed for a predetermined time.
  • the action recognition unit 292 integrates the above-described determinations, and recognizes that the stop action has been performed when the child C1 is stopped at the geographical position PT1.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 performs a process of recognizing the stop motion from a remote position separated from the geographical position PT1 by a predetermined distance (a third predetermined distance dt3 in the illustrated example) to the geographical position PT1. Also good.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 specifies a remote position that is a third predetermined distance dt3 in front of the geographical position PT1 in the vicinity of the current position acquired from the data center 4B, and changes the geographical position PT1 from the specified remote position. Until it arrives, processing for recognizing the stop operation may be performed.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 performs a left / right confirmation operation when the head of the child C1 (for example, a face) faces leftward and rightward with respect to the child C1. Recognize that
  • the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes that the hand raising operation has been performed when the hand portion (for example, the palm) of the child C1 is positioned upward with respect to the child C1.
  • the operation recognizing unit 292 transmits information indicating that the predetermined operation is recognized to the data center 4B at the timing when it is recognized that the predetermined operation has been performed.
  • the notification unit 421 stops the notification when the notification indicating the approach of the geographical position is started to the child C1 and when the information indicating that the predetermined operation is performed is received from the motion recognition unit 292. .
  • the motion recognition unit 292 may be able to recognize all of the predetermined operations (for example, stop operation, left / right confirmation operation, and raising hand operation), or only a part of the predetermined operation (for example, only the left / right confirmation operation and raising hand operation). Etc.) may be recognizable.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of notification stop processing of the notification unit 421 according to the fourth modification of the embodiment.
  • the notification unit 421 determines whether notification has been started (step S500). When the notification is not started (NO side of step S500), the notification unit 421 repeats the process of step S500 and waits until the notification is started. On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 has started notification (YES in step S500), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S502. And the alerting
  • step S502 When the predetermined operation is not performed (NO side of step S502), the notification unit 421 repeats the process of step S502 and waits until receiving information indicating that the predetermined operation has been performed. On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 receives information indicating that a predetermined operation has been performed (YES in step S502), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S504. And the alerting
  • the information communication system 1B estimates that a necessary action has been performed for traffic safety when the child C1 performs a predetermined operation at a geographical position, and is unnecessary. It is possible to prevent the notification from being continued.
  • the notification part 421 performed various notifications to the child C1 by vibrating the vibrator 25 in the second to fourth modifications described above, the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the notification may be performed, for example, when the speaker 26 outputs sound.
  • increasing the notification amount is, for example, at least one of increasing the sound volume and increasing the frequency of sound output.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes the moving speed of the child C1 based on the detection signal output by the radar 22 based on the detection signal output by the radar 22 .
  • the moving speed of the child C1 may be recognized based on the output of the acceleration sensor 28, for example.
  • the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes the moving speed of the child C1 by integrating the output of the acceleration sensor 28 and deriving the moving speed of the child C1.
  • the notification unit 421 may perform notification based on the moving speed of the child C1. For example, when the moving speed of the child C1 is high, the notification unit 421 may increase the notification start timing or increase the notification amount as compared to the case where the movement speed is low. Thereby, the information communication system 1B can promptly notify the child C1 who is likely to run and jump out on the road.
  • the notification unit 421 is based on the position information of the child C1 acquired by the position detection unit 24 and the geographical position information, and approaches the geographical position PT1.
  • the notification unit 421 derives the predicted arrival time of the geographical position PT1 based on the moving speed of the child C1, and determines whether or not the geographical position PT1 is approached based on the derived predicted arrival time. Good.
  • the notification unit 421 derives an expected arrival time to arrive at the geographical position PT1, and determines whether or not the geographical position PT1 has approached based on the derived expected arrival time.
  • the geographical position PT1 is determined in advance and stored as the geographical position information in the storage unit 44B.
  • the geographical location PT1 may be specified from, for example, the second mobile terminal 3 possessed by the guardian of the child C1.
  • the second portable terminal 3 executes a program (software) used when setting the geographical position PT1 as a program (software) stored in a storage unit (not shown) of the second portable terminal 3. .
  • a map image is displayed on the display unit 34 by executing this program (software).
  • the guardian inputs the start position and the end position of the route on which the child C1 walks when going to and from school to a reception unit (not shown) provided in the second mobile terminal 3.
  • the reception unit is an operation device such as a button, a keyboard, and a mouse, for example.
  • the reception unit is a touch panel formed integrally with the display unit 34
  • the second portable terminal 3 superimposes a plurality of route rt candidates that the child C1 is estimated to walk on the map image based on the start position and the end position received by the reception unit, and presents them on the display unit 34. To do.
  • the guardian selects a route rt on which the child C1 actually walks from among the plurality of presented route rt candidates.
  • the accepting unit accepts an operation of a guardian who designates the geographical position PT1 that the child C1 wants to perform a predetermined action on the selected (designated) route rt.
  • the information on the geographical position PT1 of the storage unit 44B includes information indicating the geographical position PT1 designated by the guardian. Thereby, the information communication system 1B can notify the child C1 of the approach of the geographical position PT1 designated by the guardian.
  • the accepting unit may designate the route rt on which the child C1 actually walks by inputting the position of the route rt on the touch panel by the guardian with respect to the displayed map image.
  • the control unit 36 is in the vicinity of the specified position. It may be corrected to a position on the route rt or on the sidewalk.
  • reporting part 421 demonstrated the case where the alerting
  • the notification unit 421 may perform notification that prompts a predetermined operation at the geographical position PT1. In this case, for example, when the approach determination unit 291 determines that the child C1 has approached the geographical position PT1, the notification unit 421 confirms “pause at the intersection!” Then, raise your hand and let's cross the pedestrian crossing! "
  • reporting part 421 may alert
  • the notification unit 421 may perform notification that praises the child C1.
  • the notification that praises the child C1 is notification that the vibrator 25 is vibrated according to a predetermined rhythm, and that the speaker 26 outputs a voice that praises the child C1 “You have confirmed right and left! .
  • reporting part 421 may alert
  • the notification that pays attention to the child C1 is notification that the vibrator 25 is vibrated according to a predetermined rhythm, and a sound that warns the child C1 that “It is dangerous if it does not stop properly” is output from the speaker 26.
  • the notification unit 421 may notify the evaluation result of the predetermined operation every time the predetermined operation is performed, or whenever the distance from the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 becomes less than the first predetermined distance dt1.
  • reporting part 421 does not need to alert
  • the notification unit 421 may not notify the evaluation result in a range within the first predetermined distance dt1 from the geographical position PT1. Thereby, the alerting
  • the control unit 42B may be configured to score a predetermined action performed by the child C1.
  • the control unit 42B scores the predetermined action performed by the child C1 based on whether the child C1 performs the predetermined action at the geographical position PT1 or does not perform the predetermined action, and indicates information indicating the result of the scoring. You may transmit to the 2nd portable terminal 3 of a guardian. Further, the control unit 42B may transmit the scoring result of the predetermined operation to the second portable terminal 3 every time the child C1 approaches the geographical position PT1.
  • the configuration provided in the first mobile terminal 2, the first mobile terminal 2B, or the first mobile terminal 2C and the configuration provided in the data center 4B is not limited to this.
  • the configuration provided in the first mobile terminal 2, the first mobile terminal 2B, or the first mobile terminal 2C may be provided in the data center 4B, and the configuration provided in the data center 4B is the first mobile terminal 2, One mobile terminal 2B or the first mobile terminal 2C may be provided.
  • storage part 44B may be memorize
  • the notification unit 421 of the data center 4B is stored in the storage unit 44B and the position information acquired by the position detection unit 24 of the first mobile terminal 2.
  • the approach between the first portable terminal 2 and the geographical position PT1 is determined based on the geographical position information that is present, the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the proximity determination unit 291 of each of the first mobile terminals 2B and 2C shown in the third modification and the fourth modification described above receives the geographical position information from the data center 4B, and the first mobile terminal 2 and the geographical position You may determine the approach of PT1.
  • each first mobile terminal 2, 2 ⁇ / b> B, 2 ⁇ / b> C includes the radar 22 by the front radar and the rear radar.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the radar 22, a camera, LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging or Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging) or an infrared sensor may be provided.
  • a program for realizing all or part of the functions of the data centers 4, 4A, 4B in the present invention is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium is stored in a computer system. You may perform all or one part of the processing which each data center 4, 4A, 4B performs by making it read and execute.
  • the “computer system” includes an OS and hardware such as peripheral devices.
  • the “computer system” includes a WWW system having a homepage providing environment (or display environment).
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” means a portable medium such as a flexible disk, a magneto-optical disk, a ROM and a CD-ROM, and a storage device such as a hard disk built in the computer system.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a volatile memory (RAM) inside a computer system that becomes a server or a client when a program is transmitted via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line. In addition, those holding programs for a certain period of time are also included.
  • RAM volatile memory
  • the program may be transmitted from a computer system storing the program in a storage device or the like to another computer system via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium.
  • the “transmission medium” for transmitting the program refers to a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line.
  • the program may be for realizing a part of the functions described above.
  • a difference file difference file (difference program) may be sufficient.
  • an operation confirmation system capable of confirming a predetermined operation of a mobile person.
  • Display part (position setting part), 35 ... Speaker, 36 ... Control part (notification part, position setting part, position correction part), 41 ... Communication part, 42, 42A, 42B ... Control unit (position acquisition unit, position determination , Notification unit, operation acquisition unit, operation determination unit, evaluation unit), 43 ... model storage unit, 44, 44A, 44B ... storage unit, 45 ... voice recognition model storage unit, 46 ... voice recognition unit, 47 ... scenario storage unit 292 ... Motion recognition unit (motion determination unit, speed acquisition unit, output unit), 421 ... Notification unit (notification correction unit, output unit), ARP ... Predetermined range (separation position, notification region), C1 ... Child (moving person) , Pedestrians, children), PT1 ... Geographical position (first set position)

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Dentistry (AREA)
  • Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Emergency Management (AREA)
  • Alarm Systems (AREA)
  • Emergency Alarm Devices (AREA)
  • Traffic Control Systems (AREA)
  • Purses, Travelling Bags, Baskets, Or Suitcases (AREA)
  • Telephonic Communication Services (AREA)
  • Navigation (AREA)

Abstract

This information communication system (1) is provided with a first terminal (2) and a control unit (42). The first mobile terminal (2) is carried by a travelling person. The control unit (42) is provided in a data center (4) capable of communication with the first mobile terminal (2). The control unit (42) acquires actions of the travelling person. On the basis of the travelling person's actions, the control unit (42) determines that a prescribed action has been performed.

Description

動作確認システムOperation confirmation system
 本発明は、動作確認システムに関する。
 本願は、2018年6月11日に日本に出願された日本国特願2018-111419号及び2018年8月2日に日本に出願された日本国特願2018-146316号に基づき優先権を主張し、それらの内容をここに援用する。
The present invention relates to an operation confirmation system.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-111419 filed in Japan on June 11, 2018 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-146316 filed in Japan on August 2, 2018 And their contents are incorporated herein.
 従来、児童が携行する背負い鞄に取り付けられたカメラ、スピーカ及び送受信機と、送受信部、モニタ及びマイクロフォンを備える端末装置とによって、登下校時等における児童の安全を監視するシステムが知られている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a system for monitoring the safety of a child at the time of going to and from school or the like by a camera, a speaker and a transmitter / receiver attached to a carrying bag carried by the child and a terminal device including a transmitter / receiver, a monitor and a microphone is known. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).
日本国特開2006-285749号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-285749
 ところで、上記従来技術に係るシステムは、背負い鞄に取り付けられたカメラによって児童の前方を撮像し、撮像により得られた画像を、通信ネットワークを介して児童の保護者等が操作する端末装置に送信する。また、端末装置のマイクロフォンによって収音された保護者等の音声は、通信ネットワークを介して送信され、背負い鞄のスピーカから出力される。
 しかしながら、背負い鞄に取り付けられるカメラによれば、例えば交差点及び道路を横断する位置等の危険性がある場所における児童の動作を確認することは困難である。例えば交差点での左右確認動作及び道路を横断する際の挙手動作等の児童の所定動作が実行されているか否かを確認することができない場合、児童の見守りを適正に支援することができないという問題が生じる。
By the way, the system according to the above prior art takes an image of the front of the child with a camera attached to the carrying bag, and transmits the image obtained by the imaging to a terminal device operated by a child's guardian or the like via a communication network. To do. Further, the voice of the guardian or the like collected by the microphone of the terminal device is transmitted via the communication network and output from the speaker on the back.
However, according to the camera attached to the carrying bag, it is difficult to confirm the movement of the child in a place where there is a danger such as a position crossing an intersection or a road. For example, if it is not possible to confirm whether or not a child's prescribed actions such as a left-right confirmation action at an intersection and a hand-raising action when crossing a road are being performed, it is not possible to properly support the child's watch Occurs.
 本発明は、上記の問題点に鑑みてなされたものであって、移動者の所定動作を確認することができる動作確認システムを提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide an operation confirmation system capable of confirming a predetermined motion of a mobile person.
 (1):この発明の一態様に係る動作確認システムは、移動者によって携帯される端末と、前記移動者の動作を取得する動作取得部と、前記端末又は前記端末と通信可能なサーバに設けられるとともに、前記動作取得部が取得した動作に基づき所定動作が行われたことを判断する動作判断部とを備える。 (1): An operation check system according to an aspect of the present invention is provided in a terminal carried by a mobile person, an operation acquisition unit that acquires the mobile user's action, and a server that can communicate with the terminal or the terminal. And an operation determination unit that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed based on the operation acquired by the operation acquisition unit.
 (2):上記(1)の態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の前進移動を取得し、前記動作判断部は、前記移動者が前進移動から該前進移動を止める前進移動停止となったことを判断してもよい。 (2): In the above aspect (1), the motion acquisition unit acquires the forward movement of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit is configured to stop the forward movement from stopping the forward movement from the forward movement. You may judge that
 (3):上記(2)の態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記端末の現在位置を取得する位置取得部を含み、前記動作判断部は、前記位置取得部が取得した前記現在位置に基づき判断してもよい。 (3): In the aspect of the above (2), the operation acquisition unit includes a position acquisition unit that acquires a current position of the terminal, and the operation determination unit is based on the current position acquired by the position acquisition unit. You may judge.
 (4):上記(3)の態様において、前記位置取得部は、前記端末の外部から受ける電磁波により測位してもよい。 (4): In the above aspect (3), the position acquisition unit may perform positioning using electromagnetic waves received from outside the terminal.
 (5):上記(3)の態様において、前記位置取得部は、周辺物体からの電磁波と記憶された地図情報との照会に基づいて測位してもよい。 (5): In the aspect of (3) above, the position acquisition unit may perform positioning based on an inquiry between electromagnetic waves from surrounding objects and stored map information.
 (6):上記(2)の態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記端末の移動速度を取得する速度取得部を含み、前記動作判断部は、前記速度取得部が取得した前記移動速度に基づいて判断してもよい。 (6): In the aspect of the above (2), the operation acquisition unit includes a speed acquisition unit that acquires the movement speed of the terminal, and the operation determination unit is based on the movement speed acquired by the speed acquisition unit. You may judge.
 (7):上記(6)の態様において、前記速度取得部は、前記端末に設けられるとともに、物理量を検出する検出装置であってもよい。 (7): In the aspect of (6) above, the speed acquisition unit may be a detection device that is provided in the terminal and detects a physical quantity.
 (8):上記(1)の態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の頭部の動作を取得し、前記動作判断部は、前記頭部が前記移動者の移動方向に対する左右に振られたことを判断してもよい。 (8): In the above aspect (1), the motion acquisition unit acquires the motion of the head of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit swings the head to the left or right with respect to the moving direction of the mobile person. You may judge that
 (9):上記(1)の態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の顔の向きを取得し、前記動作判断部は、前記顔の向きが前記移動者の移動方向に対する左右に向けられたことを判断してもよい。 (9): In the aspect of (1), the motion acquisition unit acquires the orientation of the face of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit directs the orientation of the face to the left and right with respect to the movement direction of the mobile person. You may judge that
 (10):上記(1)の態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の手部の位置及び動きのうち少なくともいずれかを取得し、前記動作判断部は、前記手部が前記移動者の肩部よりも高い領域である所定領域に位置することを判断してもよい。 (10): In the aspect of the above (1), the motion acquisition unit acquires at least one of the position and movement of the hand of the mobile person, and the motion determination unit has the hand part of the mobile user. It may be determined that it is located in a predetermined area which is an area higher than the shoulder portion of.
 (11):上記(8)から(10)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記動作取得部は、前記端末の外の物体の位置及び動きのうち少なくともいずれかを遠隔で検出する遠隔検出部を含んでもよい。 (11): In any one of the above aspects (8) to (10), the motion acquisition unit is a remote detection unit that remotely detects at least one of the position and movement of an object outside the terminal. May be included.
 (12):上記(10)に従属する(11)の態様において、前記遠隔検出部は、前記物体からの電磁波を受ける受信部を備え、前記端末は、前記所定領域に位置する前記手部が前記受信部の検出範囲内となるよう配置されてもよい。 (12): In the aspect of (11) subordinate to (10), the remote detection unit includes a reception unit that receives electromagnetic waves from the object, and the terminal includes the hand unit located in the predetermined area. You may arrange | position so that it may become in the detection range of the said receiving part.
 (13):上記(12)の態様において、前記端末は、前記移動者の頭部が更に前記受信部の検出範囲内となるよう配置されてもよい。 (13): In the aspect of the above (12), the terminal may be arranged such that the head of the moving person is further within the detection range of the receiving unit.
 (14):上記(1)から(13)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記所定動作がなされるよう事前に設定された地理的位置である設定位置を記憶する記憶部を備えてもよい。 (14): In any one aspect of the above (1) to (13), the terminal or the server stores a set position that is a geographical position set in advance so that the predetermined operation is performed. May be provided.
 (15):上記(14)の態様において、前記設定位置は、前記移動者が通行する道路において、前記移動者に対する危険が発生する可能性がある特定位置に設定されてもよい。 (15): In the aspect of (14), the set position may be set to a specific position where there is a possibility of danger to the mobile person on a road on which the mobile person passes.
 (16):上記(15)の態様において、前記道路は、該道路が交差する交差点を含み、前記設定位置は、前記交差点に設定されてもよい。 (16): In the aspect of the above (15), the road may include an intersection where the road intersects, and the set position may be set at the intersection.
 (17):上記(16)の態様において、前記道路は、車両が通行する車道と区画された歩道を含み、前記設定位置は、前記交差点における前記歩道上に設定されてもよい。 (17): In the aspect of (16) above, the road may include a roadway through which a vehicle passes and a sidewalk that is partitioned, and the set position may be set on the sidewalk at the intersection.
 (18):上記(14)から(17)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記設定位置は、前記移動者の移動起点と移動終点とに関する入力情報に基づいて、前記移動起点と前記移動終点との経路上に設定されてもよい。 (18): In any one of the above aspects (14) to (17), the set position is based on input information related to the movement start point and the movement end point of the mover, and the movement start point and the movement end point It may be set on the route.
 (19):上記(18)の態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記移動起点と前記移動終点とに基づいて、前記経路上に前記設定位置を設定する位置設定部を備えてもよい。 (19): In the aspect of (18), the terminal or the server may include a position setting unit that sets the set position on the route based on the movement start point and the movement end point.
 (20):上記(14)から(17)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記設定位置は、前記端末又は該端末とは異なる他の端末に対する位置指定に関する入力情報に基づいて設定されてもよい。 (20): In any one of the above aspects (14) to (17), the set position may be set based on input information related to position designation for the terminal or another terminal different from the terminal. .
 (21):上記(20)の態様において、前記入力情報は、道路部領域と非道路部領域とを含む地図上の位置を示し、前記入力情報が前記非道路部領域に位置する場合、前記入力情報を近接する前記道路部領域に補正する位置補正部を備えてもよい。 (21): In the above aspect (20), the input information indicates a position on a map including a road part region and a non-road part region, and when the input information is located in the non-road part region, You may provide the position correction | amendment part which correct | amends input information to the said road part area | region which adjoins.
 (22):上記(21)の態様において、前記道路部領域は、車道部領域と歩道部領域とを含み、前記位置補正部は、前記入力情報が前記非道路部領域又は前記車道部領域に位置する場合、前記入力情報を近接する前記歩道部領域に補正してもよい。 (22): In the aspect of the above (21), the road part region includes a roadway part region and a sidewalk part region, and the position correction unit includes the input information in the non-road part region or the roadway part region. When located, the input information may be corrected to the adjacent sidewalk area.
 (23):上記(1)から(22)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記移動者によって前記所定動作がなされるよう事前に設定された地理的位置である設定位置は、第1設定位置と前記第1設定位置とは別の第2設定位置とを含み、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記第1設定位置において前記動作判断部が判断した第1判断結果及び前記第2設定位置において前記動作判断部が判断した第2判断結果に基づいて、前記移動者の動作を複合的に評価する評価部を備えてもよい。 (23): In any one of the above aspects (1) to (22), the set position which is a geographical position set in advance so that the predetermined operation is performed by the mobile person is the first set position. A second setting position different from the first setting position, and the terminal or the server performs the first determination result determined by the operation determination unit at the first setting position and the operation at the second setting position. An evaluation unit that compositely evaluates the movement of the mobile person may be provided based on the second determination result determined by the determination unit.
 (24):上記(23)の態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記端末の外部又は前記端末若しくは前記サーバと通信可能に設けられる他の端末に対して、前記評価を出力する出力部を備えてもよい。 (24): In the aspect of (23), the terminal or the server includes an output unit that outputs the evaluation to the outside of the terminal or to another terminal provided to be communicable with the terminal or the server. You may prepare.
 (25):上記(24)の態様において、前記出力部は、前記端末の外部に前記評価を出力するとともに、前記設定位置の近傍では出力しなくてもよい。 (25): In the aspect of (24) above, the output unit may output the evaluation outside the terminal and may not output in the vicinity of the set position.
 (26):上記(24)の態様において、前記出力部は、前記他の端末に対して前記評価を出力するとともに、前記設定位置における前記評価の後に順次出力してもよい。 (26): In the above aspect (24), the output unit may output the evaluation to the other terminal and sequentially output the evaluation at the set position.
 (27):上記(23)から(26)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記動作判断部は、前記端末に設けられ、前記評価部は、前記サーバに設けられてもよい。 (27): In any one of the above aspects (23) to (26), the operation determination unit may be provided in the terminal, and the evaluation unit may be provided in the server.
 (28):上記(1)から(27)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバに設けられるとともに、事前に設定された地理的位置である設定位置を記憶する記憶部と、前記設定位置に対して所定だけ離隔した離隔位置において前記設定位置への前記端末の接近を報知する報知部とを備えてもよい。 (28): In any one of the above aspects (1) to (27), the storage unit is provided in the terminal or the server and stores a set position that is a preset geographical position; And a notifying unit for notifying the approach of the terminal to the set position at a predetermined distance from the set position.
 (29):上記(28)の態様において、前記報知部は、前記端末が前記離隔位置から前記設定位置に近づくほど、前記報知の量を増加させてもよい。 (29): In the above aspect (28), the notification unit may increase the amount of notification as the terminal approaches the set position from the remote position.
 (30):上記(28)又は(29)の態様において、前記報知部は、前記報知の開始後に前記端末が前記設定位置から遠ざかるほど、前記報知の量を減少させてもよい。 (30): In the above aspect (28) or (29), the notification unit may decrease the notification amount as the terminal moves away from the set position after the start of the notification.
 (31):上記(28)から(30)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記報知部は、前記報知の開始後に前記動作判断部が前記所定動作を判断した場合に前記報知を停止してもよい。 (31): In any one of the aspects (28) to (30), the notification unit may stop the notification when the operation determination unit determines the predetermined operation after the start of the notification. Good.
 (32):上記(28)から(31)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記報知部は、前記報知の開始後に前記端末が前記設定位置に対して所定だけ離隔した場合に前記報知を停止してもよい。 (32): In any one of the above aspects (28) to (31), the notification unit stops the notification when the terminal is separated from the set position by a predetermined amount after the start of the notification. May be.
 (33):上記(28)から(32)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記端末の現在位置を取得する位置取得部と、前記現在位置に基づき前記端末が前記離隔位置よりも前記設定位置に近い領域である報知領域内に位置することを判断する位置判断部とを備えてもよい。 (33): In any one of the above aspects (28) to (32), the terminal or the server includes a position acquisition unit that acquires a current position of the terminal, and the terminal based on the current position. And a position determination unit that determines that the position is within a notification area that is closer to the set position than the position.
 (34):上記(33)の態様において、前記位置判断部は、前記現在位置と前記設定位置との直線距離に基づき前記端末が前記報知領域内に位置することを判断してもよい。 (34): In the aspect of (33), the position determination unit may determine that the terminal is located in the notification area based on a linear distance between the current position and the set position.
 (35):上記(33)又は(34)の態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記端末の移動速度を取得する速度取得部を備え、前記報知部は、前記移動速度に基づき前記報知を修正する報知修正部を備えてもよい。 (35): In the aspect of (33) or (34), the terminal or the server includes a speed acquisition unit that acquires a movement speed of the terminal, and the notification unit reports the notification based on the movement speed. You may provide the alerting | reporting correction part to correct.
 (36):上記(35)の態様において、前記報知修正部は、前記移動速度が速いほど、遅いときに比べて、前記報知の開始が早くなるよう修正してもよい。 (36): In the above aspect (35), the notification correction unit may correct the start of the notification earlier as the moving speed is higher than when it is slower.
 (37):上記(35)の態様において、前記報知修正部は、前記移動速度が速いほど、遅いときに比べて、前記報知の量が増加するよう修正してもよい。 (37): In the aspect of the above (35), the notification correction unit may correct the notification amount so that the amount of the notification increases as the moving speed increases.
 (38):上記(28)から(32)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記端末の移動速度を取得する速度取得部と、前記移動速度に基づき前記端末が前記離隔位置に到達したことを判断する位置判断部とを備えてもよい。 (38): In any one of the above aspects (28) to (32), the terminal or the server may include a speed acquisition unit that acquires a moving speed of the terminal, and the terminal based on the moving speed. A position determination unit that determines that the position has been reached may be provided.
 (39):上記(38)の態様において、前記位置判断部は、前記移動速度に基づいて求めた前記設定位置までの到達時間に基づき前記離隔位置に到達したことを判断してもよい。 (39): In the aspect of (38), the position determination unit may determine that the remote position has been reached based on an arrival time to the set position obtained based on the moving speed.
 (40):上記(1)から(39)のいずれか1つの態様において、前記移動者は、歩行者であってもよい。 (40): In any one of the above aspects (1) to (39), the mobile person may be a pedestrian.
 (41):上記(40)の態様において、前記歩行者は、児童であってもよい。 (41): In the above aspect (40), the pedestrian may be a child.
 (42):上記(1)から(41)のいずれか1つの態様において前記端末は、前記移動者の携行物に配置されてもよい。 (42): In any one of the above aspects (1) to (41), the terminal may be arranged in the traveling object of the mobile person.
 (43):上記(42)の態様において、前記携行物は、肩掛け鞄であってもよい。 (43): In the above aspect (42), the carry item may be a shoulder bag.
 (44):上記(43)の態様において、前記肩掛け鞄は、背負い鞄であってもよい。 (44): In the above aspect (43), the shoulder bag may be a shoulder bag.
 上記(1)によれば、動作取得部及び動作判断部を備えることによって、所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(2)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、所定動作として前進移動停止が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
According to (1) above, by providing the motion acquisition unit and the motion determination unit, it can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion has been performed.
In the case of (2) above, the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not forward movement stop has been performed as a predetermined motion.
 上記(3)の場合、端末の現在位置に基づき、移動者の移動などに関する所定動作を精度良く判断することができる。
 上記(4)の場合、例えば衛星、基地局及び各種設備等から受ける測位用の電磁波によって、端末の現在位置の精度を向上させることができる。
 上記(5)の場合、例えば測域センサ、ライダー及びカメラ等によるセンシングと地図情報とに基づく推定によって、端末の現在位置を取得することができる。
In the case of (3) above, based on the current position of the terminal, it is possible to accurately determine a predetermined operation related to the movement of the mobile person.
In the case of (4) above, the accuracy of the current position of the terminal can be improved by positioning electromagnetic waves received from, for example, a satellite, a base station, and various facilities.
In the case of (5) above, for example, the current position of the terminal can be acquired by estimation based on sensing by a range sensor, a rider, a camera, and the like and map information.
 上記(6)の場合、端末の移動速度を取得することによって、前進移動停止が行われたか否かの判断精度を向上させることができる。
 上記(7)の場合、例えば外部から受信する情報等によらずに、端末の移動速度を安定的かつ直接的に精度良く検出することができる。
In the case of (6) above, by acquiring the moving speed of the terminal, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy as to whether or not the forward movement stop has been performed.
In the case of (7) above, the moving speed of the terminal can be detected stably and directly with high accuracy, for example, without depending on information received from the outside.
 上記(8)の場合、頭部の左右動作の判断結果を、所定動作として左右確認動作等が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(9)の場合、左右の顔向け動作の判断結果を、所定動作として左右確認動作等が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(10)の場合、手部の位置及び動きの判断結果を、所定動作として挙手動作等が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
In the case of the above (8), the determination result of the left and right movement of the head can be easily used for the operation evaluation of whether or not the left and right confirmation operation or the like has been performed as the predetermined operation.
In the case of (9) above, the determination result of the left and right face movements can be easily used for the operation evaluation of whether or not the left / right confirmation operation has been performed as the predetermined operation.
In the case of the above (10), the determination result of the position and movement of the hand can be easily used for operation evaluation or the like as to whether or not a hand raising operation or the like has been performed as a predetermined operation.
 上記(11)の場合、遠隔で検出することによって、広範な範囲において検出を行うことができる。
 上記(12)の場合、手部の位置及び動きを的確に検出することができる。
 上記(13)の場合、頭部の動作及び顔の向き的確に検出することができる。
In the case of (11) above, detection can be performed in a wide range by detecting remotely.
In the case of (12) above, the position and movement of the hand can be accurately detected.
In the case of (13) above, it is possible to accurately detect head movement and face orientation.
 上記(14)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(15)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、通行道路上の危険性がある設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(16)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、通行道路上における交通の危険性がある設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(17)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、歩道上の設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
In the case of (14) above, the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily utilized for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position has been performed.
In the case of the above (15), the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to a set position with a risk on a traffic road has been performed.
In the case of (16) above, the results of motion acquisition and motion judgment can be easily utilized for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to a set position with a traffic risk on a traffic road has been performed. it can.
In the case of (17), the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position on the sidewalk has been performed.
 上記(18)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、移動経路上の設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(19)の場合、ユーザ等による設定位置の設定を容易に支援することができる。
 上記(20)の場合、ユーザ等による設定位置の直接的な指定を容易に支援することができる。
In the case of (18), the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like as to whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position on the movement route has been performed.
In the case of (19), setting of the setting position by the user or the like can be easily supported.
In the case of (20), direct designation of the setting position by the user or the like can be easily supported.
 上記(21)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、道路上の設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
 上記(22)の場合、動作取得及び動作判断の結果を、歩道上の設定位置に応じた所定動作が行われたか否かの動作評価等に容易に活用することができる。
In the case of (21) above, the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily utilized for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to a set position on the road has been performed.
In the case of (22) above, the results of motion acquisition and motion determination can be easily used for motion evaluation or the like of whether or not a predetermined motion corresponding to the set position on the sidewalk has been performed.
 上記(23)の場合、第1設定位置及び第2設定位置の第1判断結果及び第2判断結果に基づき、移動者の動作を精度良く複合的に評価することができる。
 上記(24)の場合、ユーザ等による動作評価の確認を容易に支援することができる。
 上記(25)の場合、評価の出力が過剰になることを抑制することができる。
 上記(26)の場合、ユーザ等による他の端末でのリアルタイム的な動作評価の確認を容易に支援することができる。
 上記(27)の場合、サーバにて行動評価が行われることによって、評価精度を向上させることができる。
In the case of (23) above, based on the first determination result and the second determination result of the first setting position and the second setting position, the movement of the moving person can be evaluated in a complex and accurate manner.
In the case of (24) above, confirmation of operation evaluation by the user or the like can be easily supported.
In the case of (25) above, it is possible to suppress the evaluation output from becoming excessive.
In the case of (26) above, confirmation of real-time operation evaluation at another terminal by a user or the like can be easily supported.
In the case of (27), the evaluation accuracy can be improved by performing the behavioral evaluation on the server.
 上記(28)の場合、設定位置に対して所定だけ離隔した離隔位置において設定位置への接近を報知する報知部を備えることによって、設定位置への到達を事前に移動者に認識させることができる。
 上記(29)の場合、設定位置に近づくほど報知の量を増加させることによって、設定位置に徐々に近づいていることを移動者に認識させることができる。
 上記(30)の場合、設定位置から遠ざかるほど報知の量を減少させることによって、設定位置から徐々に遠のいていることを移動者に認識させることができる。
In the case of the above (28), by providing a notification unit that notifies the approach to the setting position at a separation position that is separated from the setting position by a predetermined distance, it is possible to make the mobile person recognize in advance the arrival at the setting position. .
In the case of the above (29), by increasing the amount of notification as it approaches the set position, it is possible to make the mobile person recognize that it is gradually approaching the set position.
In the case of (30) above, by reducing the amount of notification as the distance from the set position increases, it is possible to allow the mobile person to recognize that the distance from the set position is gradually increased.
 上記(31)の場合、設定位置にて必要とされる所定動作の実行が完了したことを移動者に認識させることができるとともに、過剰な報知が行われることを抑制することができる。
 上記(32)の場合、設定位置から所定以上に離れた場合に過剰な報知が行われることを抑制することができるとともに、設定位置から所定未満の範囲において報知が途切れてしまうことを抑制することができる。
In the case of the above (31), it is possible to make the traveler recognize that the execution of the predetermined operation required at the set position is completed, and it is possible to suppress excessive notification.
In the case of the above (32), it is possible to suppress excessive notification when it is away from the setting position by a predetermined distance or more, and to prevent the notification from being interrupted in a range less than the predetermined position from the setting position. Can do.
 上記(33)の場合、現在位置に基づき報知領域内に位置することを判断することによって、判断精度を向上させることができるとともに、設定位置に近づいていることをより的確に判断することができる。
 上記(34)の場合、報知領域の設定が複雑になることを抑制し、例えば適宜の1つの地点の指定に応じた円形状の領域を設定すること等によって、判断処理が煩雑になることを抑制することができる。
 上記(35)の場合、端末の移動速度に応じてより適正な報知タイミングを設定することができる。
 上記(36)の場合、報知タイミングが遅れることを抑制することができる。
 上記(37)の場合、移動者による設定位置の把握が遅れることを抑制することができる。
In the case of (33), it is possible to improve the determination accuracy and determine more accurately that the vehicle is approaching the set position by determining that it is located in the notification area based on the current position. .
In the case of the above (34), the setting of the notification area is prevented from becoming complicated, and the determination process becomes complicated, for example, by setting a circular area according to designation of an appropriate one point. Can be suppressed.
In the case of (35) above, a more appropriate notification timing can be set according to the moving speed of the terminal.
In the case of (36) above, it is possible to suppress delay of the notification timing.
In the case of the above (37), it is possible to suppress a delay in grasping the set position by the moving person.
 上記(38)の場合、端末の位置を直接的に把握することができない場合であっても、端末の移動速度に基づいて離隔位置に到達したことを適正に判断することができる。
 上記(39)の場合、端末の位置を直接的に把握することができない場合であっても、設定位置までの到達時間に基づき判断精度を向上させることができる。
In the case of (38) above, even when the position of the terminal cannot be directly grasped, it can be properly determined that the remote position has been reached based on the moving speed of the terminal.
In the case of (39) above, even when the position of the terminal cannot be directly grasped, the determination accuracy can be improved based on the arrival time to the set position.
 上記(40)の場合、歩行者の動作を取得及び判断することができる。
 上記(41)の場合、児童の動作を取得及び判断することができる。
 上記(42)の場合、移動者が端末を携帯し忘れることを抑制することができる。
 上記(43)の場合、端末が移動者の肩部周辺に配置されることによって、動作の取得及び判断の精度を向上させることができる。
 上記(44)の場合、端末が移動者の肩部から背部周辺に配置されることによって、端末が移動者の各種動作に干渉することを抑制し、動作の取得及び判断の精度を向上させることができる。
In the case of (40) above, the movement of the pedestrian can be acquired and determined.
In the case of (41) above, it is possible to acquire and determine the behavior of the child.
In the case of (42) above, it is possible to prevent the mobile person from forgetting to carry the terminal.
In the case of (43) above, the accuracy of the acquisition and determination of the operation can be improved by arranging the terminal around the shoulder of the moving person.
In the case of (44) above, the terminal is arranged from the shoulder to the back of the mobile person so that the terminal is prevented from interfering with the mobile user's various operations, and the accuracy of operation acquisition and determination is improved. Can do.
本発明の実施形態に係る情報通信システムの構成例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structural example of the information communication system which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態に係る情報通信システムの利用シーン例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the utilization scene example of the information communication system which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態に係る第1携帯端末の構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the 1st portable terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態に係る第2携帯端末の構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the 2nd portable terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態に係る第1携帯端末位置情報をデータセンターが第2携帯端末へ送信する処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the example of a process sequence which a data center transmits the 1st portable terminal location information which concerns on embodiment of this invention to a 2nd portable terminal. 本発明の実施形態に係る第2携帯端末の表示部上に表示される第1携帯端末位置情報の例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st portable terminal position information displayed on the display part of the 2nd portable terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態に係るデータセンターが危険通知を第2携帯端末と第3携帯端末へ送信する処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the example of a process sequence which the data center which concerns on embodiment of this invention transmits a danger notice to a 2nd portable terminal and a 3rd portable terminal. 本発明の実施形態に係る第1携帯端末が危険情報を受信した際の処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example when the 1st portable terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention receives danger information. 本発明の実施形態に係る第2携帯端末が危険情報を受信した際の処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example when the 2nd portable terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention receives danger information. 本発明の実施形態に係る第2携帯端末の表示部に表示される警告画像を含む第1携帯端末位置情報の例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st portable terminal location information containing the warning image displayed on the display part of the 2nd portable terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る情報通信システムの主な動作例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the main operation examples of the information communication system which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る情報通信システムの構成例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structural example of the information communication system which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置、所定動作及びスコアの例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of the predetermined position which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention, predetermined operation | movement, and a score. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係るデータセンターが行う処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example which the data center which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention performs. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る第2携帯端末が行う処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example which the 2nd portable terminal which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention performs. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る第2携帯端末の表示部に表示されるスコアを含む情報の画像例である。It is an image example of the information containing the score displayed on the display part of the 2nd portable terminal which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置における一時停止の動作分析方法の処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example of the operation | movement analysis method of the temporary stop in the predetermined position which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置における左右確認の動作分析方法の処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example of the operation | movement analysis method of the right-and-left confirmation in the predetermined position which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置における手挙げ動作の動作分析方法の処理手順例のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the process sequence example of the operation | movement analysis method of the hand raising operation | movement in the predetermined position which concerns on the 1st modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第2変形例に係る情報通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the information communication system which concerns on the 2nd modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第2変形例に係る報知の開始タイミングを模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically the start timing of the alerting | reporting which concerns on the 2nd modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第2変形例に係る報知部の処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process of the alerting | reporting part which concerns on the 2nd modification of embodiment of this invention. 図22に示されるステップS104の地理的位置接近報知処理の詳細を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the geographical location approach alerting | reporting process of step S104 shown by FIG. 本発明の実施形態の第3変形例に係る第1携帯端末装置の構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the 1st portable terminal device which concerns on the 3rd modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第3変形例に係る報知の開始タイミングを模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically the start timing of the alerting | reporting which concerns on the 3rd modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第3変形例に係る接近判定部及び報知部の処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process of the approach determination part and alerting | reporting part which concern on the 3rd modification of embodiment of this invention. 図26に示されるステップS304の物体接近報知処理の詳細を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the object approach alerting | reporting process of step S304 shown by FIG. 本発明の実施形態の第4変形例に係る第1携帯端末の構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the 1st portable terminal which concerns on the 4th modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第4変形例に係る所定動作の認識処理を行うタイミングを模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically the timing which performs the recognition process of the predetermined operation | movement which concerns on the 4th modification of embodiment of this invention. 本発明の実施形態の第4変形例に係る報知部の報知の停止処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop process of alerting | reporting of the alerting | reporting part which concerns on the 4th modification of embodiment of this invention.
 以下、本発明の動作確認システムの実施形態について図面を参照しながら説明する。
 本発明の動作確認システムは、例えば実施形態に係る情報通信システム1である。
<情報通信システム1の構成例>
 図1は、本実施形態に係る情報通信システム1の構成例を示す図である。図1に示すように、情報通信システム1は、第1携帯端末2(第1端末)、第2携帯端末3(第2端末)、データセンター4(センター)及びサーバ5を備えている。第1携帯端末2、第2携帯端末3、データセンター4及びサーバ5は、ネットワーク6を介して相互に接続されている。
 ネットワーク6は、例えば移動体通信網である。移動体通信網は、例えば第4世代移動体通信網又は第5世代移動体通信網等である。なお、ネットワーク6は、基地局等を備える。
Hereinafter, embodiments of the operation confirmation system of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The operation check system of the present invention is, for example, the information communication system 1 according to the embodiment.
<Configuration example of information communication system 1>
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an information communication system 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the information communication system 1 includes a first mobile terminal 2 (first terminal), a second mobile terminal 3 (second terminal), a data center 4 (center), and a server 5. The first mobile terminal 2, the second mobile terminal 3, the data center 4, and the server 5 are connected to each other via a network 6.
The network 6 is a mobile communication network, for example. The mobile communication network is, for example, a fourth generation mobile communication network or a fifth generation mobile communication network. The network 6 includes a base station and the like.
 第1携帯端末2は、見守り対象である携帯者(例えば、子供などの児童)が携帯する端末である。第1携帯端末2は、通信機能を備えるロボットである。第1携帯端末2は、位置情報、同一グループ歩行者情報、周辺歩行者情報及び車両情報のうちの少なくとも1つを、ネットワーク6を介してデータセンター4へ送信する。第1携帯端末2は、データセンター4が送信した交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報のうちの少なくとも1つを、ネットワーク6を介して受信する。
 なお、第1携帯端末2の構成については後述する。同一グループ歩行者情報とは、例えば通学者が一緒に登校又は下校している同一グループ歩行者を示す同一グループ歩行者情報である。周辺歩行者情報とは、携帯者の周辺を歩いている歩行者を示す情報である。車両情報とは、歩行している道路の車両情報である。
The first portable terminal 2 is a terminal that is carried by a bearer (for example, a child such as a child) who is a watching target. The first portable terminal 2 is a robot having a communication function. The first mobile terminal 2 transmits at least one of position information, the same group pedestrian information, peripheral pedestrian information, and vehicle information to the data center 4 via the network 6. The first mobile terminal 2 receives at least one of traffic information, a message, and emergency information transmitted from the data center 4 via the network 6.
The configuration of the first mobile terminal 2 will be described later. The same group pedestrian information is, for example, the same group pedestrian information indicating the same group pedestrian who attends or leaves school together. The peripheral pedestrian information is information indicating a pedestrian walking around the carrier. The vehicle information is vehicle information of a road on which walking is performed.
 第2携帯端末3は、見守り対象である携帯者(例えば、子供などの児童)の保護者が所持する端末である。第2携帯端末3は、例えばスマートフォン、タブレット端末又はスマートウォッチ等である。第2携帯端末3は、データセンター4が送信した第1携帯端末2の位置に関する第1携帯端末位置情報を、ネットワーク6を介して受信する。なお、第1携帯端末位置情報は画像情報である。なお、第2携帯端末3の構成については後述する。 The second mobile terminal 3 is a terminal possessed by a guardian of a carrier (for example, a child such as a child) to be watched over. The 2nd portable terminal 3 is a smart phone, a tablet terminal, or a smart watch, for example. The second portable terminal 3 receives the first portable terminal position information regarding the position of the first portable terminal 2 transmitted by the data center 4 via the network 6. Note that the first portable terminal position information is image information. The configuration of the second mobile terminal 3 will be described later.
 データセンター4は、通信部41、制御部42、モデル記憶部43及び記憶部44を備えている。
 通信部41は、第1携帯端末2からネットワーク6を介して受信した位置情報、同一グループ歩行者情報、周辺歩行者情報及び車両情報などを制御部42に出力する。通信部41は、サーバ5からネットワーク6を介して受信した災害情報、不審者情報及び緊急情報などを制御部42に出力する。通信部41は、制御部42が出力する危険通知を、ネットワーク6を介して第1携帯端末2へ送信する。通信部41は、制御部42が出力する交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報などを、ネットワーク6を介して第1携帯端末2へ送信する。
 通信部41は、制御部42が出力する第1携帯端末位置情報、緊急通知及び音声メッセージなどを、ネットワーク6を介して第2携帯端末3へ送信する。また、通信部41は、第1携帯端末2から加速度センサ28の検出値の信号を受信し、受信した信号を制御部42に出力する。
The data center 4 includes a communication unit 41, a control unit 42, a model storage unit 43, and a storage unit 44.
The communication unit 41 outputs position information, the same group pedestrian information, surrounding pedestrian information, vehicle information, and the like received from the first mobile terminal 2 via the network 6 to the control unit 42. The communication unit 41 outputs disaster information, suspicious person information, emergency information, and the like received from the server 5 via the network 6 to the control unit 42. The communication unit 41 transmits the danger notification output by the control unit 42 to the first mobile terminal 2 via the network 6. The communication unit 41 transmits traffic information, messages, emergency information, and the like output from the control unit 42 to the first mobile terminal 2 via the network 6.
The communication unit 41 transmits the first mobile terminal position information, the emergency notification, the voice message, and the like output from the control unit 42 to the second mobile terminal 3 via the network 6. Further, the communication unit 41 receives a signal of a detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 from the first portable terminal 2 and outputs the received signal to the control unit 42.
 制御部42は、第1携帯端末2から受信した位置情報を記憶部44に格納する。制御部42は、サーバ5から受信した不審者情報を記憶部44に記憶させる。なお、不審者情報には、不審者が現れた位置情報及び現れた時刻等が含まれている。
 制御部42は、記憶部44が格納する位置情報と地図情報に基づいて、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者の移動軌跡を生成する。制御部42は、地図情報に生成した移動軌跡を合わせた情報を第1携帯端末位置情報として生成する。制御部42は、生成した第1携帯端末位置情報を通信部41に出力する。
 制御部42は、第1携帯端末2から受信した位置情報及び車両情報と、サーバ5から受信した緊急情報、災害情報及び不審者情報と、モデル記憶部43が記憶するモデル情報と、記憶部44が記憶する地図情報及び位置情報とに基づいて危険箇所を設定し、設定した危険箇所を示す情報を記憶部44に記憶させる。なお、危険箇所とは、災害が発生した箇所、交通事故が多い箇所及び不審者が現れた箇所等の危険が発生する可能性がある特定地点である。制御部42は、記憶部44が記憶する地図情報及び危険箇所を示す情報と、受信した位置情報とに基づいて危険通知を生成し、生成した危険通知を通信部41に出力する。
The control unit 42 stores the position information received from the first mobile terminal 2 in the storage unit 44. The control unit 42 stores the suspicious person information received from the server 5 in the storage unit 44. The suspicious person information includes the position information where the suspicious person appears, the time when the suspicious person appears, and the like.
The control unit 42 generates a movement trajectory of the person who carries the first mobile terminal 2 based on the position information and map information stored in the storage unit 44. The control part 42 produces | generates the information which match | combined the movement locus produced | generated with map information as 1st portable terminal position information. The control unit 42 outputs the generated first mobile terminal position information to the communication unit 41.
The control unit 42 includes position information and vehicle information received from the first mobile terminal 2, emergency information, disaster information and suspicious person information received from the server 5, model information stored in the model storage unit 43, and storage unit 44. Is set on the basis of the map information and the position information stored therein, and information indicating the set dangerous place is stored in the storage unit 44. In addition, a dangerous location is a specific location where danger may occur, such as a location where a disaster has occurred, a location where there are many traffic accidents, or a location where a suspicious person appears. The control unit 42 generates a danger notification based on the map information stored in the storage unit 44 and information indicating the dangerous location and the received position information, and outputs the generated danger notification to the communication unit 41.
 制御部42は、第1携帯端末2から受信した位置情報及び車両情報と、サーバ5から受信した緊急情報と、モデル記憶部43が記憶するモデル情報と、記憶部44が記憶する地図情報及び位置情報とに基づいて、交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報のうち少なくとも1つを生成する。なお、メッセージは音声信号であり、テキスト情報を言語モデル又は辞書を用いて周知の手法で音声信号に変換したものである。制御部42は、生成した交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報を通信部41に出力する。制御部42は、生成したメッセージを音声メッセージとし、緊急情報を緊急通知として通信部41に出力する。
 また、制御部42は、携帯端末の電話番号又は識別情報に基づいて、携帯者が所持する第1携帯端末2と、保護者が所持する第2携帯端末3とを関連付けて記憶部44に記憶させる。これにより、データセンター4は、複数組の第1携帯端末2及び第2携帯端末3に対して処理を行う。
The control unit 42 includes position information and vehicle information received from the first portable terminal 2, emergency information received from the server 5, model information stored in the model storage unit 43, and map information and position stored in the storage unit 44. Based on the information, at least one of traffic information, a message, and emergency information is generated. The message is an audio signal, which is text information converted into an audio signal by a well-known method using a language model or a dictionary. The control unit 42 outputs the generated traffic information, message, and emergency information to the communication unit 41. The control unit 42 outputs the generated message as a voice message, and outputs emergency information to the communication unit 41 as an emergency notification.
Further, the control unit 42 associates the first portable terminal 2 possessed by the carrier with the second portable terminal 3 possessed by the guardian and stores it in the storage unit 44 based on the telephone number or identification information of the portable terminal. Let As a result, the data center 4 performs processing on a plurality of sets of the first mobile terminal 2 and the second mobile terminal 3.
 モデル記憶部43は、モデル情報として、統計地域交通モデル、交通予測モデル等を記憶している。
 統計地域交通モデルとは、統計的に地域における交通状態等を示すものであり、移動体端末等から地図情報又は交通情報に関するデータをデータセンター4が取得し、各地域における交通情報等を統計的に示したモデルである。
 交通予測モデルとは、過去に蓄積した各地域における交通状況から将来に亘る該当地域における交通量等を予測するモデルであり、前記統計地域交通モデルからのデータに基づいて決定してもよい。例えば、交通予測モデルは、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者の登下校のルートにおける、登下校時の交通量などであってもよい。
The model storage unit 43 stores a statistical regional traffic model, a traffic prediction model, and the like as model information.
The statistical regional traffic model statistically indicates the traffic conditions in the area, and the data center 4 obtains data relating to map information or traffic information from mobile terminals, etc., and statistically calculates traffic information in each area. It is the model shown in.
The traffic prediction model is a model for predicting the traffic volume in the corresponding region in the future from the traffic situation in each region accumulated in the past, and may be determined based on the data from the statistical regional traffic model. For example, the traffic prediction model may be the traffic volume at the time of going to and from school on the route of the going to and from school of the carrier carrying the first mobile terminal 2.
 記憶部44は、地図情報を記憶する。なお、地図情報は、例えば自宅から学校までの通学路を含む地図と、携帯者が寄り道するお店(例えば、スーパーマーケット、書店及び文房具屋等)の位置情報と、帰宅前に行く塾等の位置情報とを含む。また、地図情報は、歩道及び道路の経路ネットワーク(岐点、枝)等の情報を含む。また、記憶部44は、第1携帯端末2の位置情報を格納する。記憶部44は、危険箇所を示す情報と不審者情報を記憶する。記憶部44は、危険情報を生成する際に使用される所定値を記憶する。 The storage unit 44 stores map information. The map information includes, for example, a map that includes a school route from home to school, location information of stores (such as supermarkets, bookstores, and stationery stores) to which the carrier departs, and the location of a cram school or the like to go to before going home Information. The map information includes information such as sidewalks and road route networks (divergence points and branches). In addition, the storage unit 44 stores position information of the first mobile terminal 2. The storage unit 44 stores information indicating a dangerous place and suspicious person information. The memory | storage part 44 memorize | stores the predetermined value used when producing | generating danger information.
 サーバ5は、例えば学校及び区役所等に設置されている。サーバ5は、地震及び台風等の自然災害に関する災害情報と、不審者情報等とを、ネットワーク6を介してデータセンター4へ送信する。なお、データセンター4は、これらの情報を、サーバ5との通信によって取得してもよい。 The server 5 is installed in, for example, a school and a ward office. The server 5 transmits disaster information related to natural disasters such as earthquakes and typhoons and suspicious person information to the data center 4 via the network 6. Note that the data center 4 may acquire such information through communication with the server 5.
 次に、情報通信システム1の利用シーン例を説明する。
 図2は、本実施形態に係る情報通信システム1の利用シーン例を示す図である。図2に示すように、第1携帯端末2は、例えばランドセルの肩ベルト等に取り付けられて用いられる。後述するように、第1携帯端末2は、マイクロフォン、レーダ、スピーカ、位置検出部等を備えている。第1携帯端末2は、例えば第1携帯端末2を所持する子供が発話した音声を取得して送信する。また、第1携帯端末2は、レーダの検知結果の信号をデータセンター4へ送信する。また、第1携帯端末2は、データセンター4が送信した情報及びメッセージを受信して再生及び報知する。ランドセルは、携行物、肩掛け鞄及び背負い鞄の一例である。
Next, a usage scene example of the information communication system 1 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a usage scene of the information communication system 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, the first mobile terminal 2 is used by being attached to a shoulder belt of a school bag, for example. As will be described later, the first mobile terminal 2 includes a microphone, a radar, a speaker, a position detection unit, and the like. For example, the first mobile terminal 2 acquires and transmits a voice spoken by a child carrying the first mobile terminal 2. In addition, the first mobile terminal 2 transmits a radar detection result signal to the data center 4. In addition, the first mobile terminal 2 receives information and messages transmitted from the data center 4 and reproduces and notifies them. A school bag is an example of a carried item, a shoulder bag, and a shoulder bag.
 データセンター4は、第1携帯端末2から受信した情報及びサーバ5から受信した情報に基づいて生成した交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報を第1携帯端末2へ送信する。また、データセンター4は、第1携帯端末2から受信した情報と、サーバ5から受信した情報とに基づいて生成した第1携帯端末位置情報、緊急通知及び音声メッセージを第2携帯端末3へ送信する。なお、データセンター4は、例えば登下校時に他の子供が他の第1携帯端末2を所持している場合、これらの複数の第1携帯端末2が捉えたリアルタイム情報(例えば、現在位置、同一グループ歩行者情報、周辺歩行者情報及び車両情報等)を相互に利用して各情報を生成してもよい。 The data center 4 transmits the traffic information, the message, and the emergency information generated based on the information received from the first mobile terminal 2 and the information received from the server 5 to the first mobile terminal 2. Further, the data center 4 transmits the first mobile terminal location information, the emergency notification, and the voice message generated based on the information received from the first mobile terminal 2 and the information received from the server 5 to the second mobile terminal 3. To do. Note that the data center 4 has real-time information captured by the plurality of first mobile terminals 2 (for example, the current position and the same, for example) when another child has the other first mobile terminal 2 at the time of going to and from school. Group pedestrian information, surrounding pedestrian information, vehicle information, etc.) may be mutually used to generate each information.
 第2携帯端末3は、第1携帯端末2を所持する子供が歩いているルートを含む地図情報等を含む第1携帯端末位置情報をデータセンター4から受信し、受信した第1携帯端末位置情報を状況情報として表示する。また、第2携帯端末3は、データセンター4が送信した緊急通知及び音声メッセージを受信し、受信した緊急通知又は音声メッセージを表示又は再生する。なお、第2携帯端末3に表示される画像については後述する。 The second portable terminal 3 receives the first portable terminal position information including the map information including the route that the child carrying the first portable terminal 2 is walking from the data center 4, and the received first portable terminal position information Is displayed as status information. The second mobile terminal 3 receives the emergency notification and voice message transmitted from the data center 4, and displays or reproduces the received emergency notification or voice message. The image displayed on the second mobile terminal 3 will be described later.
 サーバ5は、例えば防災行政無線による放送内容を、ネットワーク6を介してデータセンター4へ送信する。
 なお、図2に示した利用シーンは一例であり、これに限らない。
The server 5 transmits, for example, broadcast contents by the disaster prevention administrative radio to the data center 4 via the network 6.
The usage scene shown in FIG. 2 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
<第1携帯端末2の構成例>
 次に、第1携帯端末2の構成例を説明する。
 図3は、本実施形態に係る第1携帯端末2の構成例を示すブロック図である。図3に示すように、第1携帯端末2は、通信部21、レーダ22、マイクロフォン23、位置検出部24、バイブレータ25、スピーカ26、表示部27、加速度センサ28及び制御部29を備える。なお、第1携帯端末2は、操作部を備えてもよい。
<Configuration example of first mobile terminal 2>
Next, a configuration example of the first mobile terminal 2 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the first mobile terminal 2 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the first mobile terminal 2 includes a communication unit 21, a radar 22, a microphone 23, a position detection unit 24, a vibrator 25, a speaker 26, a display unit 27, an acceleration sensor 28, and a control unit 29. The first mobile terminal 2 may include an operation unit.
 通信部21は、例えば、通信用ICカードと、通信アンテナと、通信モジュールとを備える。
 通信部21は、制御部29が出力する情報(例えば、位置情報、同一グループ歩行者情報、周辺歩行者情報及び車両情報)を、ネットワーク6を介してデータセンター4へ送信する。通信部21は、データセンター4が送信した情報(例えば、交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報)を受信し、受信した情報(例えば、交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報)を制御部29に出力する。通信部21は、データセンター4が送信した危険情報を受信し、受信した危険情報を制御部29に出力する。
The communication unit 21 includes, for example, a communication IC card, a communication antenna, and a communication module.
The communication unit 21 transmits information output by the control unit 29 (for example, position information, same group pedestrian information, peripheral pedestrian information, and vehicle information) to the data center 4 via the network 6. The communication unit 21 receives information (for example, traffic information, messages, and emergency information) transmitted by the data center 4, and outputs the received information (for example, traffic information, messages, and emergency information) to the control unit 29. The communication unit 21 receives the danger information transmitted by the data center 4 and outputs the received danger information to the control unit 29.
 レーダ22は、第1携帯端末2の周囲における前方の物体を検知するフロントレーダと、第1携帯端末2の周囲における後方(例えば、フロントレーダよりも後方)の物体を検知するリヤレーダとを備える。フロントレーダ及びリヤレーダは、例えばミリ波レーダなどである。レーダ22は、例えば外部の物体に対する距離、相対速度、相対位置及び方位等に係る検知信号を制御部29に出力する。 The radar 22 includes a front radar that detects a front object around the first portable terminal 2 and a rear radar that detects an object behind the first portable terminal 2 (for example, behind the front radar). The front radar and the rear radar are, for example, millimeter wave radars. For example, the radar 22 outputs a detection signal related to the distance, relative speed, relative position, direction, and the like to an external object to the control unit 29.
 マイクロフォン23は、収音により得られる信号(例えば、音声信号など)を制御部29に出力する。なお、マイクロフォン23は、複数のマイクロフォンによって構成されるマイクロフォンアレイであってもよい。
 位置検出部24は、衛星などから測位信号を受信する測位信号受信アンテナを備える。位置検出部24は、受信した測位信号を制御部29に出力する。なお、第1携帯端末2は、例えば基地局との通信に基づいて現在位置を示す情報を取得してもよい。
The microphone 23 outputs a signal (for example, an audio signal) obtained by collecting sound to the control unit 29. Note that the microphone 23 may be a microphone array including a plurality of microphones.
The position detection unit 24 includes a positioning signal receiving antenna that receives a positioning signal from a satellite or the like. The position detection unit 24 outputs the received positioning signal to the control unit 29. In addition, the 1st portable terminal 2 may acquire the information which shows a present position based on communication with a base station, for example.
 バイブレータ25は、振動子であり、制御部29が出力する報知情報に応じて振動を発生させる。
 スピーカ26は、制御部29が出力する信号(例えば、音声信号)を音に変換する。
 表示部27は、制御部29が出力する報知情報に応じて動作する。表示部27は、例えば赤色、緑色及び青色の3色発光のLED(発光ダイオード)を備える。なお、表示部27は、例えば、液晶表示装置、有機EL(エレクトロルミネッセンス)表示装置又は電子インク表示装置等であってもよい。
 加速度センサ28は、第1携帯端末2のX軸、Y軸及びZ軸の3方向の加速度を検出し、検出した加速度の信号を制御部29に出力する。
The vibrator 25 is a vibrator and generates vibrations according to the notification information output from the control unit 29.
The speaker 26 converts a signal (for example, an audio signal) output from the control unit 29 into sound.
The display unit 27 operates according to notification information output from the control unit 29. The display unit 27 includes, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) that emit three colors of red, green, and blue. The display unit 27 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL (electroluminescence) display device, or an electronic ink display device.
The acceleration sensor 28 detects the acceleration in the three directions of the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis of the first mobile terminal 2 and outputs the detected acceleration signal to the control unit 29.
 制御部29は、レーダ22が出力する検知信号を取得する。制御部29は、マイクロフォン23が出力する音声信号を取得する。制御部29は、位置検出部24が出力する測位情報を取得する。制御部29は、通信部21が出力する危険情報を取得する。制御部29は、位置検出部24から取得した測位情報に基づく位置情報を通信部21に出力する。制御部29は、例えばレーダ22から取得した検知信号から周知の認識手法を用いて人が含まれているか否かを判別する。制御部29は、検知信号に人が含まれている場合、その検知信号を同一グループ歩行者情報又は周辺歩行者情報とし、同一グループ歩行者情報又は周辺歩行者情報を通信部21に出力する。なお、制御部29は、例えば、検知信号に含まれている人の大きさが閾値未満の場合に周辺歩行者と判別し、閾値以上の場合に同一グループ歩行者と判別する。また、制御部29は、検知信号から周知の認識手法を用いて車両が含まれているか否かを判別する。制御部29は、検知信号に車両が含まれている場合、その検知信号を車両情報とし、車両情報を通信部21に出力する。 The control unit 29 acquires a detection signal output from the radar 22. The control unit 29 acquires an audio signal output from the microphone 23. The control unit 29 acquires the positioning information output from the position detection unit 24. The control unit 29 acquires danger information output from the communication unit 21. The control unit 29 outputs position information based on the positioning information acquired from the position detection unit 24 to the communication unit 21. For example, the control unit 29 determines whether or not a person is included using a known recognition method from the detection signal acquired from the radar 22. When a person is included in the detection signal, the control unit 29 sets the detection signal as the same group pedestrian information or the surrounding pedestrian information, and outputs the same group pedestrian information or the surrounding pedestrian information to the communication unit 21. In addition, the control part 29 discriminate | determines from a surrounding pedestrian, for example, when the magnitude | size of the person included in a detection signal is less than a threshold value, and when it is more than a threshold value, it discriminate | determines from the same group pedestrian. Moreover, the control part 29 discriminate | determines whether the vehicle is contained using a known recognition method from a detection signal. When the vehicle is included in the detection signal, the control unit 29 uses the detection signal as vehicle information and outputs the vehicle information to the communication unit 21.
 制御部29は、通信部21が出力する情報(例えば、交通情報、メッセージ及び緊急情報)を取得する。制御部29は、通信部21からの情報が音声信号の場合、音声信号をスピーカ26に出力する。制御部29は、通信部21からの情報が音声信号ではない場合、情報を表示部27及びバイブレータ25の少なくとも1つに出力する。なお、制御部29は、通信部21からの情報を表示部27に出力する場合、例えば情報に応じて発光させる色又は点滅状態等を制御する。また、制御部29は、通信部21からの情報をバイブレータ25に出力する場合、例えば情報に応じて振動間隔又は振動の強さを制御する。 The control unit 29 acquires information (for example, traffic information, messages, and emergency information) output from the communication unit 21. When the information from the communication unit 21 is an audio signal, the control unit 29 outputs the audio signal to the speaker 26. When the information from the communication unit 21 is not an audio signal, the control unit 29 outputs the information to at least one of the display unit 27 and the vibrator 25. In addition, when outputting the information from the communication part 21 to the display part 27, the control part 29 controls the color or blinking state etc. which are light-emitted according to information, for example. In addition, when the information from the communication unit 21 is output to the vibrator 25, the control unit 29 controls the vibration interval or the strength of vibration according to the information, for example.
 制御部29は、危険情報に基づいて、音声メッセージを生成し、生成した音声メッセージをスピーカ26に出力する。また、制御部29は、危険情報に基づいて報知情報を生成し、生成した報知情報をバイブレータ25に出力する。
 制御部29は、加速度センサ28が出力する検出値を取得し、取得した検出値を通信部21によって、データセンター4へ送信する。
The control unit 29 generates a voice message based on the danger information, and outputs the generated voice message to the speaker 26. Further, the control unit 29 generates notification information based on the danger information, and outputs the generated notification information to the vibrator 25.
The control unit 29 acquires the detection value output from the acceleration sensor 28 and transmits the acquired detection value to the data center 4 through the communication unit 21.
<第2携帯端末3の構成例>
 次に、第2携帯端末3の構成例を説明する。
 図4は、本実施形態に係る第2携帯端末3の構成例を示すブロック図である。図4に示すように、第2携帯端末3は、通信部31、マイクロフォン32、操作部33、表示部34、スピーカ35、制御部36及びバイブレータ37を備える。
<Configuration example of second mobile terminal 3>
Next, a configuration example of the second mobile terminal 3 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, the second mobile terminal 3 includes a communication unit 31, a microphone 32, an operation unit 33, a display unit 34, a speaker 35, a control unit 36, and a vibrator 37.
 通信部31は、データセンター4が送信した第1携帯端末位置情報を受信し、受信した第1携帯端末位置情報を制御部36に出力する。通信部31は、データセンター4が送信した緊急通知又は音声メッセージを受信し、受信した緊急通知又は音声メッセージを制御部36に出力する。
 マイクロフォン32は、収音により得られる信号(例えば、音声信号など)を制御部36に出力する。なお、マイクロフォン32は、複数のマイクロフォンによって構成されるマイクロフォンアレイであってもよい。
The communication unit 31 receives the first mobile terminal position information transmitted from the data center 4 and outputs the received first mobile terminal position information to the control unit 36. The communication unit 31 receives the emergency notification or voice message transmitted from the data center 4 and outputs the received emergency notification or voice message to the control unit 36.
The microphone 32 outputs a signal (for example, an audio signal) obtained by collecting sound to the control unit 36. Note that the microphone 32 may be a microphone array including a plurality of microphones.
 操作部33は、例えば表示部34上に設けられたタッチパネルセンサである。操作部33は、利用者の操作による信号を制御部36に出力する。
 表示部34は、制御部36が出力する第1携帯端末位置情報を表示する。表示部34は、例えば、液晶表示装置、有機EL表示装置又は電子インク表示装置等である。
 スピーカ35は、制御部36が出力する信号(例えば、音声信号など)を音に変換する。
 バイブレータ37は、振動子であり、制御部36が出力する報知情報に応じて振動を発生させる。
The operation unit 33 is a touch panel sensor provided on the display unit 34, for example. The operation unit 33 outputs a signal generated by a user operation to the control unit 36.
The display unit 34 displays the first portable terminal position information output from the control unit 36. The display unit 34 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, or an electronic ink display device.
The speaker 35 converts a signal (for example, an audio signal) output from the control unit 36 into sound.
Vibrator 37 is a vibrator, and generates vibration according to the notification information output from control unit 36.
 制御部36は、通信部31が出力する第1携帯端末位置情報を取得する。制御部36は、通信部31が出力する緊急通知又は音声メッセージを取得する。制御部36は、取得した第1携帯端末位置情報を表示部34に出力する。制御部36は、緊急通知が画像情報の場合、緊急情報を表示部34に出力する。制御部36は、取得した音声メッセージをスピーカ35に出力する。制御部36は、通信部31が出力する危険情報を取得する。制御部36は、危険情報に基づいて、音声メッセージを生成し、生成した音声メッセージをスピーカ35に出力する。又は、制御部36は、危険情報に基づいて報知情報を生成し、生成した報知情報をバイブレータ37に出力する。 The control unit 36 acquires the first portable terminal position information output from the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 acquires an emergency notification or a voice message output from the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 outputs the acquired first portable terminal position information to the display unit 34. When the emergency notification is image information, the control unit 36 outputs the emergency information to the display unit 34. The control unit 36 outputs the acquired voice message to the speaker 35. The control unit 36 acquires danger information output from the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 generates a voice message based on the danger information, and outputs the generated voice message to the speaker 35. Alternatively, the control unit 36 generates notification information based on the danger information, and outputs the generated notification information to the vibrator 37.
<第1携帯端末位置情報の送信手順>
 次に、第1携帯端末位置情報をデータセンター4が第2携帯端末3へ送信する処理手順例を説明する。
 図5は、本実施形態に係る第1携帯端末位置情報をデータセンター4が第2携帯端末3へ送信する処理手順例のフローチャートである。
<First mobile terminal location information transmission procedure>
Next, a processing procedure example in which the data center 4 transmits the first mobile terminal position information to the second mobile terminal 3 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example in which the data center 4 transmits the first mobile terminal position information according to the present embodiment to the second mobile terminal 3.
 (ステップS11)制御部42は、第1携帯端末2から位置情報を、ネットワーク6を介して通信部41によって受信する。なお、位置情報には、受信した時刻情報が含まれている。
 (ステップS12)制御部42は、受信した位置情報を記憶部44に格納する。
(Step S <b> 11) The control unit 42 receives position information from the first portable terminal 2 by the communication unit 41 via the network 6. The positional information includes received time information.
(Step S <b> 12) The control unit 42 stores the received position information in the storage unit 44.
 (ステップS13)制御部42は、記憶部44が記憶する位置情報と地図情報を用いて、第1携帯端末位置情報を生成する。なお、制御部42は、位置情報に含まれる時刻情報を時系列順に繋いで、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者の移動軌跡を生成する。続けて、制御部42は、第1携帯端末位置情報を、ネットワーク6を介して通信部41によって第2携帯端末3へ送信する。 (Step S13) The control unit 42 generates the first portable terminal position information using the position information and map information stored in the storage unit 44. Note that the control unit 42 connects the time information included in the position information in chronological order, and generates a movement trajectory of the person who carries the first portable terminal 2. Subsequently, the control unit 42 transmits the first portable terminal position information to the second portable terminal 3 by the communication unit 41 via the network 6.
 なお、データセンター4は、例えば、第1携帯端末位置情報の送信リクエストを第2携帯端末3から受信した場合に、図5に示した処理を行う。第1携帯端末位置情報の送信リクエストは、保護者による第2携帯端末3の操作部33に対する操作に応じて、制御部36から通信部31を介して送信される。
 また、データセンター4は、例えば、予め設定されている時刻に、図5に示した処理を実行してもよい。予め設定される時刻は、例えば、保護者による第2携帯端末3の操作部33に対する操作に応じて設定される携帯者の登校時刻及び下校時刻などである。
For example, when the data center 4 receives a transmission request for the first mobile terminal position information from the second mobile terminal 3, the data center 4 performs the processing illustrated in FIG. The transmission request for the first mobile terminal position information is transmitted from the control unit 36 via the communication unit 31 in response to an operation on the operation unit 33 of the second mobile terminal 3 by the guardian.
Further, the data center 4 may execute the processing shown in FIG. 5 at a preset time, for example. The preset time is, for example, the attendance time and the school leaving time of the mobile person set in accordance with the operation of the guardian on the operation unit 33 of the second mobile terminal 3.
 図6は、本実施形態に係る第2携帯端末3の表示部34に表示される第1携帯端末位置情報の例を示す図である。
 図6に示す第1携帯端末位置情報は、例えば携帯者の下校時の第1携帯端末位置情報である。この第1携帯端末位置情報は、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者の移動軌跡g11及び現在位置g12の情報を備える。
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of first mobile terminal position information displayed on the display unit 34 of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the present embodiment.
The first mobile terminal position information shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, the first mobile terminal position information when the mobile person leaves school. The first portable terminal position information includes information on the movement locus g11 and the current position g12 of the person who carries the first portable terminal 2.
<危険通知の送信手順>
 以下に、データセンター4が危険通知を第1携帯端末2と第2携帯端末3へ送信する処理手順例を説明する。
 図7は、本実施形態に係るデータセンター4が危険通知を第1携帯端末2と第2携帯端末3へ送信する処理手順例のフローチャートである。
<Procedure for sending danger notice>
Hereinafter, an example of a processing procedure in which the data center 4 transmits a danger notice to the first mobile terminal 2 and the second mobile terminal 3 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example in which the data center 4 according to the present embodiment transmits a danger notice to the first mobile terminal 2 and the second mobile terminal 3.
 (ステップS21)データセンター4の制御部42は、サーバ5にアクセスする。
 (ステップS22)制御部42は、危険箇所を示す情報と不審者情報をサーバ5から通信部41によって取得する。制御部42は、取得した危険箇所を示す情報と不審者情報を記憶部44に記憶させる。なお、危険箇所は、例えば不審者情報が得られた位置(緯度経度)を含む所定の範囲又は不審者情報が得られた番地等の範囲を含む。なお、範囲は、制御部42が設定してもよい。
(Step S <b> 21) The control unit 42 of the data center 4 accesses the server 5.
(Step S <b> 22) The control unit 42 acquires information indicating a dangerous location and suspicious person information from the server 5 by the communication unit 41. The control unit 42 causes the storage unit 44 to store the acquired information indicating the dangerous location and the suspicious person information. The dangerous part includes, for example, a predetermined range including a position (latitude and longitude) where suspicious person information is obtained, or a range such as an address where suspicious person information is obtained. Note that the range may be set by the control unit 42.
 (ステップS23)制御部42は、第1携帯端末2から位置情報を取得する。なお、位置情報は、データセンター4からのリクエストに基づいて、第1携帯端末2が送信してもよく、第1携帯端末2が所定の周期で送信してもよい。制御部42は、取得した位置情報を記憶部44に記憶させる。 (Step S <b> 23) The control unit 42 acquires position information from the first mobile terminal 2. The location information may be transmitted by the first mobile terminal 2 based on a request from the data center 4 or may be transmitted by the first mobile terminal 2 at a predetermined cycle. The control unit 42 stores the acquired position information in the storage unit 44.
 (ステップS24)制御部42は、記憶部44が記憶する地図情報と危険箇所を示す情報と位置情報とに基づいて、危険箇所と携帯者の現在位置との間の距離を算出する。
 (ステップS25)制御部42は、算出した距離が記憶部44に記憶された所定値未満であるか否かを判定する。制御部42は、距離が所定値未満であると判定した場合(ステップS25;YES)、ステップS26の処理に進める。制御部42は、距離が所定値以上であると判定した場合(ステップS25;NO)、ステップS21の処理に戻す。
(Step S24) The control unit 42 calculates the distance between the dangerous location and the current position of the carrier based on the map information stored in the storage unit 44, the information indicating the dangerous location, and the location information.
(Step S <b> 25) The control unit 42 determines whether the calculated distance is less than a predetermined value stored in the storage unit 44. When it is determined that the distance is less than the predetermined value (step S25; YES), the control unit 42 proceeds to the process of step S26. When it is determined that the distance is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S25; NO), the control unit 42 returns to the process of step S21.
 (ステップS26)制御部42は、危険情報を生成する。制御部42は、生成した危険情報を通信部41によって、第2携帯端末3へ送信することで危険を通知する。なお、制御部42は、危険情報が報知音の場合、第1携帯端末2が危険箇所に近づくにつれて、報知音を大きくする。
 (ステップS27)制御部42は、生成した危険情報を通信部41によって、第1携帯端末2へ送信することで危険を通知する。なお、制御部42は、危険情報が報知音の場合、第1携帯端末2が危険箇所に近づくにつれて、報知音を大きくする。
(Step S26) The control unit 42 generates danger information. The control unit 42 notifies the danger by transmitting the generated danger information to the second portable terminal 3 through the communication unit 41. In addition, when the danger information is a notification sound, the control unit 42 increases the notification sound as the first portable terminal 2 approaches the dangerous place.
(Step S <b> 27) The control unit 42 notifies the danger by transmitting the generated danger information to the first mobile terminal 2 through the communication unit 41. In addition, when the danger information is a notification sound, the control unit 42 increases the notification sound as the first portable terminal 2 approaches the dangerous place.
 なお、上述した例では、データセンター4が、サーバ5から危険箇所を示す情報を取得する例を説明したが、これに限らない。危険箇所は、例えば保護者が第2携帯端末3の操作部33を操作して設定し、設定された情報をデータセンター4の制御部42が取得してもよい。 In the above-described example, the example in which the data center 4 acquires information indicating the dangerous part from the server 5 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the guardian may set the dangerous part by operating the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3, and the control unit 42 of the data center 4 may acquire the set information.
<危険通知の受信処理>
 次に、携帯者が所持する第1携帯端末2が危険情報を受信した際の処理手順例を説明する。
 図8は、本実施形態に係る第1携帯端末2が危険情報を受信した際の処理手順例のフローチャートである。
<Danger notification reception processing>
Next, an example of a processing procedure when the first portable terminal 2 possessed by the carrier receives the danger information will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example when the first portable terminal 2 according to the present embodiment receives the danger information.
 (ステップS31)第1携帯端末2の制御部29は、データセンター4が送信した危険情報を通信部21によって受信する。
 (ステップS32)制御部29は、危険情報に基づいて危険を知らせる音声メッセージを生成して、生成した音声メッセージをスピーカ26から再生させる。また、制御部29は、危険情報に基づいて、例えばブザー音を生成し、生成したブザー音をスピーカ26により再生する。なお、スピーカ26がブザーである場合、制御部29は、危険情報に基づいて所定の電圧をスピーカ26に出力する。これにより、制御部29は、危険情報に基づく音声出力を行う。なお、制御部29は、危険箇所と携帯者の現在位置との間の距離が短くなるほど、音量を大きくする。
(Step S <b> 31) The control unit 29 of the first mobile terminal 2 receives the danger information transmitted by the data center 4 by the communication unit 21.
(Step S <b> 32) The control unit 29 generates a voice message informing the danger based on the danger information, and reproduces the generated voice message from the speaker 26. Moreover, the control part 29 produces | generates a buzzer sound, for example based on danger information, and reproduces | regenerates the produced | generated buzzer sound with the speaker 26. FIG. When the speaker 26 is a buzzer, the control unit 29 outputs a predetermined voltage to the speaker 26 based on the danger information. Thereby, the control part 29 performs the audio | voice output based on danger information. Note that the control unit 29 increases the volume as the distance between the dangerous location and the current position of the wearer decreases.
 (ステップS33)制御部29は、スピーカ26からの音声出力が禁止されたバイブレータモードであるか否かを判別する。なお、制御部29は、バイブレータモードの設定を、例えば、第1携帯端末2が備える操作部(不図示)に対する操作に応じて実行してもよいし、第2携帯端末3からの指示に応じて実行してもよい。
 制御部29は、バイブレータモードであると判別した場合(ステップS33;YES)、ステップS34の処理に進める。一方、制御部29は、バイブレータモードではない判別した場合(ステップS33;NO)、処理をステップS31に戻す。なお、制御部29は、バイブレータモードの場合、ステップS32の処理を行わなくてもよいし、又は、ステップS32の処理の代わりに表示部27を点滅等させてもよい。
(Step S <b> 33) The control unit 29 determines whether or not it is a vibrator mode in which sound output from the speaker 26 is prohibited. The control unit 29 may set the vibrator mode in accordance with, for example, an operation on an operation unit (not shown) provided in the first mobile terminal 2 or in response to an instruction from the second mobile terminal 3. May be executed.
When it is determined that the vibrator mode is the vibrator mode (step S33; YES), the control unit 29 proceeds to the process of step S34. On the other hand, the control part 29 returns a process to step S31, when it determines with it not being vibrator mode (step S33; NO). Note that, in the vibrator mode, the control unit 29 may not perform the process of step S32 or may blink the display unit 27 instead of the process of step S32.
 (ステップS34)制御部29は、危険情報に基づいてバイブレータ25を駆動する。
なお、制御部29は、危険箇所と携帯者の現在位置との間の距離が短くなるほど、バイブレータ25の振動の振幅を大きくしてもよいし、又は、振動の間隔を短くしてもよい。
(Step S34) The control unit 29 drives the vibrator 25 based on the danger information.
In addition, the control part 29 may enlarge the amplitude of the vibration of the vibrator 25, or may shorten the space | interval of a vibration, so that the distance between a dangerous location and a present | current position of a wearer becomes short.
 次に、保護者が所持する第2携帯端末3が危険情報を受信した際の処理手順例を説明する。
 図9は、本実施形態に係る第2携帯端末3が危険情報を受信した際の処理手順例のフローチャートである。
Next, an example of a processing procedure when the second portable terminal 3 possessed by the guardian receives the danger information will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example when the second portable terminal 3 according to the present embodiment receives the danger information.
 (ステップS41)第2携帯端末3の制御部36は、データセンター4が送信した危険情報を通信部31によって受信する。
 (ステップS42)制御部36は、危険情報に基づいて危険を知らせる音声メッセージを生成して、生成した音声メッセージをスピーカ35から再生させる。又は、制御部36は、危険情報に基づいて、例えばブザー音を生成し、生成したブザー音をスピーカ35によって再生する。なお、スピーカ35がブザーである場合、制御部36は、危険情報に基づいて所定の電圧をスピーカ35に出力する。これにより、制御部36は、危険情報に基づく音声出力が行う。なお、制御部36は、危険箇所と携帯者の現在位置との間の距離が短くなるほど、音量を大きくする。
(Step S <b> 41) The control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 receives the danger information transmitted from the data center 4 by the communication unit 31.
(Step S <b> 42) The control unit 36 generates a voice message informing the danger based on the danger information, and reproduces the generated voice message from the speaker 35. Or the control part 36 produces | generates a buzzer sound, for example based on danger information, and reproduces | regenerates the produced | generated buzzer sound with the speaker 35. FIG. When the speaker 35 is a buzzer, the control unit 36 outputs a predetermined voltage to the speaker 35 based on the danger information. Thereby, the control part 36 performs the audio | voice output based on danger information. Note that the control unit 36 increases the volume as the distance between the dangerous place and the current position of the wearer decreases.
 (ステップS43)制御部36は、バイブレータモードであるか否かを判別する。なお、制御部36は、バイブレータモードの設定を、第2携帯端末3の操作部33が操作された結果に応じて設定する。制御部36は、バイブレータモードであると判別した場合(ステップS43;YES)、ステップS44の処理に進める。一方、制御部36は、バイブレータモードではない判別した場合(ステップS43;NO)、ステップS45の処理に進める。なお、制御部36は、バイブレータモードの場合、ステップS42の処理を行わなくてもよいし、又は、ステップS42の処理の代わりに表示部34を点滅等させてもよい。 (Step S43) The control unit 36 determines whether or not the vibrator mode is set. The control unit 36 sets the vibrator mode according to the result of operating the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3. When the control unit 36 determines that the vibrator mode is set (step S43; YES), the control unit 36 proceeds to the process of step S44. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is not the vibrator mode (step S43; NO), the control unit 36 proceeds to the process of step S45. Note that, in the vibrator mode, the control unit 36 may not perform the process of step S42, or may blink the display unit 34 instead of the process of step S42.
 (ステップS44)制御部36は、危険情報に基づいてバイブレータ37を駆動する。
なお、制御部36は、危険箇所と携帯者の現在位置との間の距離が短くなるほど、バイブレータ37の振動の振幅を大きくしてもよいし、又は、振動の間隔を短くしてもよい。
(Step S44) The controller 36 drives the vibrator 37 based on the danger information.
Note that the control unit 36 may increase the vibration amplitude of the vibrator 37 or shorten the vibration interval as the distance between the dangerous place and the current position of the wearer becomes shorter.
 (ステップS45)制御部36は、保護者が操作部33を操作した結果に基づいて、第1携帯端末位置情報の送信リクエストを通信部31によって、データセンター4へ送信する。データセンター4の制御部42は、受信した送信リクエストに基づいて、第1携帯端末位置情報に危険を知らせる警告画像を付与して、通信部31によって第2携帯端末3へ送信する。制御部36は、データセンター4が送信した第1携帯端末位置情報を通信部31によって受信する。制御部36は、受信した第1携帯端末位置情報を表示部34に表示させる。 (Step S45) The control unit 36 transmits a transmission request for the first portable terminal position information to the data center 4 through the communication unit 31 based on the result of the guardian operating the operation unit 33. Based on the received transmission request, the control unit 42 of the data center 4 attaches a warning image notifying the danger to the first portable terminal position information and transmits the warning image to the second portable terminal 3 by the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 receives the first portable terminal position information transmitted from the data center 4 by the communication unit 31. The control unit 36 causes the display unit 34 to display the received first portable terminal position information.
 図10は、本実施形態に係る第2携帯端末3の表示部34に表示される警告画像を含む第1携帯端末位置情報の例を示す図である。
 図10に示す第1携帯端末位置情報は、例えば携帯者の下校時の第1携帯端末位置情報である。この第1携帯端末位置情報は、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者の移動軌跡g11及び現在位置g12の情報と、危険箇所を示す画像g21と、警告画像g22とを備える。
 図10に示す第1携帯端末位置情報では、携帯者が所持する第1携帯端末2の現在位置が、危険箇所内であるため、所定文言(例えば、「危険箇所にいます。ご注意ください!」)の警告画像g22が他の情報に重畳又は合成されて表示される。なお、警告画像は、制御部36が受信した警告情報に基づいて生成されてもよい。
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of first mobile terminal position information including a warning image displayed on the display unit 34 of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the present embodiment.
The first mobile terminal position information shown in FIG. 10 is, for example, the first mobile terminal position information when the mobile person leaves school. The first portable terminal position information includes information on the movement locus g11 and the current position g12 of the person carrying the first portable terminal 2, an image g21 indicating a dangerous place, and a warning image g22.
In the first mobile terminal position information shown in FIG. 10, the current position of the first mobile terminal 2 possessed by the mobile phone is within the danger area, so a predetermined wording (for example, “You are in the danger area. Please be careful! ]) Warning image g22 is superimposed or combined with other information and displayed. The warning image may be generated based on the warning information received by the control unit 36.
 なお、第1携帯端末2の制御部29は、レーダ22から取得した検知信号を同一グループ歩行者情報、周辺歩行者情報又は車両情報として、通信部21によってデータセンター4へ送信してもよい。 The control unit 29 of the first portable terminal 2 may transmit the detection signal acquired from the radar 22 to the data center 4 by the communication unit 21 as the same group pedestrian information, surrounding pedestrian information, or vehicle information.
 また、データセンター4の制御部42は、例えばサーバ5から受信した情報に基づいて、交通量が多い箇所に第1携帯端末2の所持者が近づいたとき、交通情報を通信部41によって第1携帯端末2に送信してもよい。
 なお、交通情報は音声信号であってもよい。第1携帯端末2の制御部29は、受信した交通情報を再生する。これにより、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者は、交通量が多い箇所に近づいたことを知ることができる。
 また、データセンター4の制御部42は、例えばサーバ5から受信した情報に基づいて緊急情報を第1携帯端末2と第2携帯端末3へ送信してもよい。緊急情報とは、例えば災害や事故が発生した場合に、避難を呼びかける情報である。
In addition, the control unit 42 of the data center 4 uses the communication unit 41 to transmit the traffic information to the first part when the owner of the first mobile terminal 2 approaches a place with a large traffic volume based on, for example, information received from the server 5. You may transmit to the portable terminal 2. FIG.
The traffic information may be an audio signal. The control unit 29 of the first mobile terminal 2 reproduces the received traffic information. Thereby, the portable person who possesses the 1st portable terminal 2 can know that he approached the location with much traffic.
Moreover, the control part 42 of the data center 4 may transmit emergency information to the 1st portable terminal 2 and the 2nd portable terminal 3 based on the information received from the server 5, for example. The emergency information is information calling for evacuation when, for example, a disaster or accident occurs.
 以上のように、本実施形態では、携帯者が所持又は鞄等に取り付けた第1携帯端末2によって取得した位置情報を、データセンター4に集約して、保護者が所持する第2携帯端末3へ送信する。また、本実施形態では、不審者情報を、行政又は学校のサーバ5からデータセンター4へ集約する。データセンター4は、不審者情報を取得した際、第1携帯端末2の現在位置と危険箇所との距離が所定値未満の場合に、第1携帯端末2を所持する携帯者と、第2携帯端末3を所持する保護者とに、危険情報を送信する。
 これにより、本実施形態によれば、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が危険箇所に近づいているときに、第1携帯端末2の携帯者(例えば、子供などの児童)又は第2携帯端末3の所持者(例えば、保護者など)に対して危険通知を行うことができる。
As described above, in the present embodiment, the location information acquired by the first portable terminal 2 carried by the carrier or attached to the bag or the like is collected in the data center 4 and the second portable terminal 3 possessed by the guardian. Send to. In the present embodiment, suspicious person information is collected from the administrative or school server 5 to the data center 4. When the data center 4 acquires the suspicious person information and the distance between the current position of the first portable terminal 2 and the dangerous location is less than a predetermined value, the data center 4 and the second portable The danger information is transmitted to the guardian who owns the terminal 3.
Thereby, according to this embodiment, when the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 is approaching a dangerous place, the carrier (for example, children, such as a child) of the 1st portable terminal 2, or the 2nd portable terminal 3 A danger notice can be sent to the owner (eg, a guardian, etc.).
 また、本実施形態では、第1携帯端末2が危険箇所に近づくにつれて、警報音等を大きくする。
 これにより、本実施形態によれば、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が危険箇所に近づいていることを、より一層、的確に通知することができる。
 また、本実施形態では、第2携帯端末3は、第1携帯端末2の移動軌跡を取得する。
 これにより、本実施形態によれば、第1携帯端末2の携帯者の移動軌跡(例えば、学校から自宅までの帰宅経路など)を第2携帯端末3の所持者が把握することができる。
Moreover, in this embodiment, an alarm sound etc. are enlarged as the 1st portable terminal 2 approaches a dangerous location.
Thereby, according to this embodiment, it can notify more accurately that the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 is approaching a dangerous place.
In the present embodiment, the second mobile terminal 3 acquires the movement locus of the first mobile terminal 2.
Thereby, according to this embodiment, the holder of the 2nd portable terminal 3 can grasp | ascertain the movement locus | trajectory (for example, a return route from a school to a home etc.) of the portable person of the 1st portable terminal 2.
<情報通信システムの第1変形例>
 以下に、データセンター4Aが、第1携帯端末2から受信した情報に基づいて、通学経路等の所定位置において行うべき所定動作が行われた否かを判別して、判別した結果を第2携帯端末3へ送信する例を説明する。なお、後述するように所定位置は、上述した危険箇所を含む位置の情報であってもよい。
<First Modification of Information Communication System>
Hereinafter, the data center 4A determines whether or not a predetermined operation to be performed at a predetermined position such as a school route is performed based on the information received from the first mobile terminal 2, and the determination result is the second mobile phone. An example of transmission to the terminal 3 will be described. As will be described later, the predetermined position may be information on a position including the above-described dangerous place.
 まず、実施形態の第1変形例の情報通信システム1Aの主な動作例を説明する。
 図11は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る情報通信システム1Aの主な動作例を示す図である。
 符号g100は、帰宅した際の第1携帯端末2と携帯者(例えば、子供などの児童)との対話例を示す図である。符号g100が示す図において、符号g101が子供の発話であり、符号g102が第1携帯端末2の発話である。
First, a main operation example of the information communication system 1A according to the first modification of the embodiment will be described.
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a main operation example of the information communication system 1A according to the first modification of the embodiment.
Symbol g100 is a diagram illustrating an example of an interaction between the first portable terminal 2 and a carrier (for example, a child such as a child) when returning home. In the figure indicated by reference sign g100, reference sign g101 is a child's utterance, and reference sign g102 is the first mobile terminal 2's utterance.
 符号g110は、帰宅した際の子供と保護者との対話例を示す図である。符号g110が示す図において、符号g111が保護者の発話であり、符号g112が子供の発話であり、符号g113が第1携帯端末2の発話である。 Symbol g110 is a diagram showing an example of dialogue between the child and the guardian when returning home. In the diagram indicated by reference sign g110, reference sign g111 is the utterance of the guardian, reference sign g112 is the utterance of the child, and reference sign g113 is the utterance of the first portable terminal 2.
 符号g120は、第2携帯端末3に表示される画像例を示す図である。表示される画像は、データセンター4から受信した画像である。符号g121は、データセンター4から受信した画像である。画像g121は、スコアの画像g122、子供の移動軌跡の画像g122、確認箇所での動作確認結果の画像g123とg124が含まれている。 The symbol g120 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the second portable terminal 3. The displayed image is an image received from the data center 4. A symbol g121 is an image received from the data center 4. The image g121 includes a score image g122, a child movement trajectory image g122, and motion confirmation result images g123 and g124 at the confirmation location.
<情報通信システム1Aの構成>
 次に、情報通信システム1Aの構成例を説明する。
 図12は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る情報通信システム1Aの構成例を示す図である。図12に示すように、情報通信システム1Aは、第1携帯端末2、第2携帯端末3、データセンター4A(センター)及びサーバ5を備えている。第1携帯端末2、第2携帯端末3、データセンター4A及びサーバ5は、ネットワーク6を介して相互に接続されている。なお、情報通信システム1と同様の動作を行う機能部については、同じ符号を用いて説明を省略又は簡略化する。図12に示すように、情報通信システム1と変形例の情報通信システム1Aとの差異は、データセンター4Aである。
<Configuration of Information Communication System 1A>
Next, a configuration example of the information communication system 1A will be described.
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an information communication system 1A according to the first modification of the embodiment. As illustrated in FIG. 12, the information communication system 1 </ b> A includes a first mobile terminal 2, a second mobile terminal 3, a data center 4 </ b> A (center), and a server 5. The first mobile terminal 2, the second mobile terminal 3, the data center 4 </ b> A, and the server 5 are connected to each other via a network 6. In addition, about the function part which performs the operation | movement similar to the information communication system 1, description is abbreviate | omitted or simplified using the same code | symbol. As shown in FIG. 12, the difference between the information communication system 1 and the modified information communication system 1A is a data center 4A.
 図12に示すように、データセンター4Aは、通信部41、制御部42A、モデル記憶部43、記憶部44A、音声認識モデル記憶部45、音声認識部46及びシナリオ記憶部47を備えている。 As shown in FIG. 12, the data center 4A includes a communication unit 41, a control unit 42A, a model storage unit 43, a storage unit 44A, a voice recognition model storage unit 45, a voice recognition unit 46, and a scenario storage unit 47.
 音声認識モデル記憶部45は、例えば音響モデル、言語モデル、単語辞書等を記憶している。音響モデルとは、音の特徴量に基づくモデルであり、言語モデルとは、単語とその並び方の情報のモデルである。また、単語辞書とは、多数の語彙による辞書であり、例えば大語彙単語辞書である。 The voice recognition model storage unit 45 stores, for example, an acoustic model, a language model, a word dictionary, and the like. The acoustic model is a model based on the feature amount of sound, and the language model is a model of information on words and how to arrange them. The word dictionary is a dictionary with a large number of vocabularies, for example, a large vocabulary word dictionary.
 音声認識部46は、制御部42Aが出力する音声信号に対して発話区間の音声信号を検出する。発話区間の検出は、例えば所定のしきい値以上の音声信号を発話区間として検出する。なお、音声認識部46は、発話区間の検出を周知の他の手法を用いて行ってもよい。音声認識部46は、検出した発話区間の音声信号に対して、音声認識モデル記憶部45を参照して、周知の手法を用いて音声認識を行う。なお、音声認識部46は、例えば特開2015-64554号公報に開示されている手法等を用いて音声認識を行う。音声認識部46は、認識した認識結果に対して音声認識モデル記憶部45を参照してテキストに変換する。音声認識部46は、テキスト情報に対して音声認識モデル記憶部45を参照して形態素解析と係り受け解析を行う。係り受け解析には、例えば、Shift-reduce法や全域木の手法やチャンク同定の段階適用手法においてSVM(Support Vector Machines)を用いる。音声認識部46は、解析結果を制御部42Aに出力する。 The voice recognition unit 46 detects the voice signal in the utterance section with respect to the voice signal output from the control unit 42A. For the detection of the utterance section, for example, an audio signal having a predetermined threshold value or more is detected as the utterance section. Note that the speech recognition unit 46 may perform detection of the utterance section using another known method. The speech recognition unit 46 performs speech recognition on the detected speech signal in the utterance section with reference to the speech recognition model storage unit 45 using a known method. Note that the voice recognition unit 46 performs voice recognition using, for example, a technique disclosed in JP-A-2015-64554. The speech recognition unit 46 converts the recognized recognition result into text with reference to the speech recognition model storage unit 45. The speech recognition unit 46 performs morphological analysis and dependency analysis on the text information with reference to the speech recognition model storage unit 45. For the dependency analysis, for example, SVM (Support Vector Machines) is used in the shift-reduce method, the spanning tree method, and the chunk identification stage application method. The voice recognition unit 46 outputs the analysis result to the control unit 42A.
 シナリオ記憶部47は、第1携帯端末2が用いられる環境で行われる対話を、例えばテキスト形式で記憶する。 The scenario storage unit 47 stores a dialogue performed in an environment where the first mobile terminal 2 is used, for example, in a text format.
 制御部42Aは、制御部42が行う処理に加えて以下の処理を行う。
 制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2から通信部41が受信したレーダ22の検知信号と、第1携帯端末2から通信部41が受信した加速度センサ28の検出値とを受信する。制御部42Aは、設定されている位置で所定動作が行われてか否かを、受信したレーダ22の検知信号と加速度センサ28の検出値の少なくとも1つに基づいて判別する。制御部42Aは、判別した結果に基づいて、例えば帰宅時のスコアを求める。制御部42Aは、求めたスコアを記憶部44Aに記憶させる。
 制御部42Aは、子供の移動軌跡の画像に、スコアの画像と、判別した結果を示す画像とを含めた画像を生成する。制御部42Aは、第2携帯端末3からスコア送信のリクエストを受信した場合、生成した画像を第2携帯端末3へ送信する。なお、所定動作が行われたか否かの判別方法及びスコアの求め方については後述する。
 また、制御部42Aは、音声認識部46が出力する解析結果を取得する。制御部42Aは、解析結果に基づいて、シナリオ記憶部47を参照して、第1携帯端末2から受信した音声信号に対する返答を選択する。制御部42Aは、選択した応答を、例えばフォルマント合成の手法等によって音声信号に変換し、変換した音声信号を通信部41によって第1携帯端末2へ送信する。
The control unit 42A performs the following processing in addition to the processing performed by the control unit 42.
The control unit 42 </ b> A receives the detection signal of the radar 22 received by the communication unit 41 from the first portable terminal 2 and the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 received by the communication unit 41 from the first portable terminal 2. The control unit 42A determines whether or not a predetermined operation is performed at the set position based on at least one of the received detection signal of the radar 22 and the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28. The control unit 42A obtains, for example, a score when returning home based on the determined result. The control unit 42A stores the obtained score in the storage unit 44A.
The control unit 42A generates an image including a score image and an image indicating the determined result in the image of the child's movement trajectory. When receiving a score transmission request from the second portable terminal 3, the control unit 42 </ b> A transmits the generated image to the second portable terminal 3. A method for determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed and how to obtain a score will be described later.
Further, the control unit 42A acquires the analysis result output by the voice recognition unit 46. Based on the analysis result, the control unit 42A refers to the scenario storage unit 47 and selects a response to the audio signal received from the first portable terminal 2. The control unit 42A converts the selected response into an audio signal by, for example, a formant synthesis method, and transmits the converted audio signal to the first portable terminal 2 by the communication unit 41.
 記憶部44Aは、記憶部44が記憶する情報に加えて、所定位置を示す情報(緯度経度、地点名)に所定動作とスコアを関連付けて記憶する。また、記憶部44Aは、例えば帰宅時におけるスコアの合計を記憶する。また、記憶部44は、所定動作が行われたか否かを判別する際に用いる閾値を記憶する。さらに、記憶部44Aは、レーダ22の検知信号に対する検出に用いられる顔部のモデルデータ及び腕部のモデルデータを記憶する。 44 A of memory | storage parts associate and store a predetermined operation | movement and a score in the information (latitude / longitude, a point name) which shows a predetermined position in addition to the information which the memory | storage part 44 memorize | stores. In addition, the storage unit 44A stores, for example, the total score when returning home. In addition, the storage unit 44 stores a threshold value used when determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed. Furthermore, the storage unit 44 </ b> A stores face model data and arm model data used for detection of the detection signal of the radar 22.
 なお、保護者は、第2携帯端末3の操作部33を操作して、通学経路を予め設定してもよい。この場合、第2携帯端末3の制御部36は、通学経路を示す情報を、通信部31によってデータセンター4Aへ送信してもよい。また、保護者は、第2携帯端末3の操作部33を操作して、所定動作を行うべき所定位置を設定してもよい。この場合、第2携帯端末3の制御部36は、所定位置を示す情報を、通信部31によってデータセンター4Aへ送信してもよい。また、保護者は、第2携帯端末3の操作部33を操作して、所定動作を設定してもよい。この場合、第2携帯端末3の制御部36は、所定位置で行う所定動作を示す情報を、通信部31によってデータセンター4Aへ送信してもよい。
 なお、データセンター4Aは、例えばサーバ5から危険箇所を取得し、取得した危険箇所を所定位置に設定してもよい。そして、所定位置の種類に応じて、所定動作を設定してもよい。
Note that the guardian may operate the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3 to set the school route in advance. In this case, the control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 may transmit information indicating the school route to the data center 4A by the communication unit 31. Further, the guardian may operate the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3 to set a predetermined position where the predetermined operation should be performed. In this case, the control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 may transmit information indicating the predetermined position to the data center 4A by the communication unit 31. Further, the guardian may set the predetermined operation by operating the operation unit 33 of the second portable terminal 3. In this case, the control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 may transmit information indicating a predetermined operation performed at a predetermined position to the data center 4A by the communication unit 31.
For example, the data center 4A may acquire a dangerous spot from the server 5 and set the acquired dangerous spot at a predetermined position. Then, a predetermined operation may be set according to the type of the predetermined position.
 次に、所定位置、所定動作及びスコアの例を説明する。
 図13は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置、所定動作及びスコアの例を示す図である。
 なお、図13に示す例は、帰宅経路(帰宅路)における所定位置と、所定動作及びスコアの一部であり、スコアの合計が帰宅経路において100点になるように設定されている。
 図13に示す例では、所定箇所は、A交差点と、B交差点と、C交差点である。所定動作は、例えばA交差点において、一時停止と左右確認である。また、スコアは、例えばA交差点において、一時停止が10、左右確認が10である。
 制御部42Aは、A交差点において、一時停止の動作が行われていた場合にスコアを10、行われていなかった場合にスコアを0とする。そして、学校から自宅までにおけるスコアの合計を求め、求めたスコアの合計を記憶部44Aに記憶させる。なお、制御部42Aは、100点から、行われなかった所定動作のスコアを減算して合計のスコアを求めてもよい。
Next, examples of the predetermined position, the predetermined operation, and the score will be described.
FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the predetermined position, the predetermined operation, and the score according to the first modification example of the embodiment.
Note that the example shown in FIG. 13 is a predetermined position on the return route (return home route), a predetermined action, and a part of the score, and the total score is set to 100 points on the return route.
In the example shown in FIG. 13, the predetermined locations are the A intersection, the B intersection, and the C intersection. The predetermined operation is, for example, temporary stop and left / right confirmation at the A intersection. The score is 10 for the temporary stop and 10 for the left / right confirmation at the A intersection, for example.
The control unit 42A sets the score to 10 when the pause operation is performed at the A intersection, and sets the score to 0 when the operation is not performed. Then, the total score from school to home is obtained, and the obtained total score is stored in the storage unit 44A. Note that the control unit 42A may obtain a total score by subtracting a score of a predetermined action that has not been performed from 100 points.
 次に、データセンター4Aが行う処理手順例を説明する。
 図14は、実施形態の第1変形例に係るデータセンター4Aが行う処理手順例のフローチャートである。なお、図14に示す例は、制御部42Aが、レーダ22の検知信号に基づいて所定動作が行われたか否かを判別する例である。
Next, an example of a processing procedure performed by the data center 4A will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example performed by the data center 4A according to the first modification of the embodiment. In the example illustrated in FIG. 14, the control unit 42 </ b> A determines whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed based on the detection signal of the radar 22.
 (ステップS51)データセンター4Aの制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2が送信した位置情報を受信する。
 (ステップS52)制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2が送信したレーダ22の検知信号を受信する。なお、第1携帯端末2は、所定周期毎に位置情報と検知信号をデータセンター4Aへ送信する。
(Step S51) The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the position information transmitted by the first mobile terminal 2.
(Step S52) The control unit 42A receives the detection signal of the radar 22 transmitted from the first mobile terminal 2. In addition, the 1st portable terminal 2 transmits a positional information and a detection signal to the data center 4A for every predetermined period.
 (ステップS53)制御部42Aは、位置が所定箇所の場合、受信した検知信号に基づいて、所定動作が行われたか否かを判別することで動作分析を行う。
 (ステップS54)制御部42Aは、動作分析した結果と記憶部44Aが記憶する情報に基づいて、スコアリング処理を行う。なお、スコアリング処理とは、例えば、加点、減点処理である。
(Step S53) When the position is a predetermined location, the control unit 42A performs an operation analysis by determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed based on the received detection signal.
(Step S54) The control unit 42A performs a scoring process based on the result of the operation analysis and the information stored in the storage unit 44A. The scoring process is, for example, a point addition or deduction process.
 (ステップS55)制御部42Aは、第2携帯端末3からスコア送信のリクエストを受信したか否かを判別する。制御部42Aは、第2携帯端末3からリクエストを受信したと判別した場合(ステップS55;YES)、処理をステップS56に進める。一方、制御部42Aは、第2携帯端末3からリクエストを受信していないと判別した場合(ステップS55;NO)、処理をステップS51に戻す。 (Step S55) The control unit 42A determines whether a score transmission request is received from the second portable terminal 3. When it is determined that the request has been received from the second portable terminal 3 (step S55; YES), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request is not received from the second portable terminal 3 (step S55; NO), the control unit 42A returns the process to step S51.
 (ステップS56)制御部42Aは、子供の移動軌跡の画像に、スコアの画像及び判別した結果を示す画像を含めた画像を生成する。制御部42Aは、生成した画像を第2携帯端末3へ送信する。 (Step S56) The control unit 42A generates an image including the image of the score and the image indicating the determination result in the image of the child's movement trajectory. The control unit 42 </ b> A transmits the generated image to the second mobile terminal 3.
 なお、図14に示した例では、データセンター4Aは、第2携帯端末3からリクエストを受信したと判別した場合にスコアを含む情報を送信する例を説明したが、これに限らない。データセンター4Aは、例えば保護者によって設定された時刻又は所定の周期毎にスコアを含む情報を送信するようにしてもよい。 In the example illustrated in FIG. 14, the data center 4 </ b> A has described the example in which the information including the score is transmitted when it is determined that the request is received from the second mobile terminal 3, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the data center 4A may transmit information including a score at a time set by a guardian or every predetermined period.
 次に、第2携帯端末3が行う処理手順例を説明する。
 図15は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る第2携帯端末3が行う処理手順例のフローチャートである。
 (ステップS61)第2携帯端末3の制御部36は、データセンター4Aが送信したスコアを含む情報を受信する。
 (ステップS62)制御部36は、受信したスコアを含む情報を表示部34に表示させる。
 なお、図15に示した処理は、第2携帯端末3からリクエストを送信したとき、保護者によって設定された時刻又は所定の周期毎に実行されてもよい。
Next, an example of a processing procedure performed by the second mobile terminal 3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example performed by the second mobile terminal 3 according to the first modification of the embodiment.
(Step S61) The control unit 36 of the second portable terminal 3 receives information including the score transmitted by the data center 4A.
(Step S62) The control unit 36 causes the display unit 34 to display information including the received score.
The process shown in FIG. 15 may be executed at a time set by the guardian or at a predetermined cycle when a request is transmitted from the second portable terminal 3.
 図16は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る第2携帯端末3の表示部34に表示されるスコアを含む情報の画像例である。
 画像g200は、表示部34上に表示される画像である。
 符号g201は、学校を示している。符号g202は、自宅を示している。
 符号g203は、子供の移動軌跡を示す画像である。
 符号g211、g212およびg213は、所定箇所を示している。
FIG. 16 is an image example of information including a score displayed on the display unit 34 of the second mobile terminal 3 according to the first modification of the embodiment.
The image g200 is an image displayed on the display unit 34.
A symbol g201 indicates a school. A symbol g202 indicates a home.
Reference numeral g203 is an image showing the movement trajectory of the child.
Reference numerals g211, g212, and g213 indicate predetermined locations.
 符号g221は、符号g211における所定動作の判別結果を表している。なお、○印は、所定動作を行ったことを表している。
 符号g222は、符号g212における所定動作の判別結果を表している。
 符号g223は、符号g213における所定動作の判別結果を表している。なお、×印は、所定動作を行っていないことを表している。
 符号g230は、合計スコアを表す画像である。
A symbol g221 represents a determination result of the predetermined operation in the symbol g211. The circles indicate that a predetermined operation has been performed.
A symbol g222 represents a determination result of the predetermined operation in the symbol g212.
A symbol g223 represents a determination result of the predetermined operation in the symbol g213. Note that a cross indicates that a predetermined operation is not performed.
A symbol g230 is an image representing the total score.
 なお、図16において、所定動作を行った場合の符号g221、g222を例えば青色で表示し、所定動作を行っていない場合の符号g223を、例えば赤色で表示してもよい。このような画像は、データセンター4Aの制御部42Aが生成する。 In FIG. 16, the symbols g221 and g222 when the predetermined operation is performed may be displayed in blue, for example, and the symbol g223 when the predetermined operation is not performed may be displayed in red, for example. Such an image is generated by the control unit 42A of the data center 4A.
 以下、所定位置における一時停止の動作分析方法の例を説明する。
 図17は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置における一時停止の動作分析方法の処理手順例のフローチャートである。なお、制御部42Aは、カウンタ値Tをゼロに初期化した後に以下の処理を開始する。また、制御部42Aは、以下の処理を所定位置で行う。
Hereinafter, an example of an operation analysis method for pause at a predetermined position will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example of an operation analysis method for pause at a predetermined position according to the first modification of the embodiment. The control unit 42A starts the following process after initializing the counter value T to zero. Further, the control unit 42A performs the following processing at a predetermined position.
 (ステップS71)データセンター4Aの制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2から位置情報を受信する。制御部42Aは、受信した位置情報を受信した時刻情報に関連付けて記憶部44に記憶させる。 (Step S71) The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the position information from the first mobile terminal 2. The control unit 42A stores the received position information in the storage unit 44 in association with the received time information.
 (ステップS72)制御部42Aは、記憶部44Aに記憶させた前回の位置(現在時刻に最も近い時刻の位置情報)と、受信した位置情報とを比較し、前回と同じ位置であるか否かを判別する。制御部42Aは、前回と同じ位置であると判別した場合(ステップS72;YES)、ステップS73の処理に進める。一方、制御部42Aは、前回と同じ位置ではないと判別した場合(ステップS72;NO)、処理をステップS74に進める。 (Step S72) The control unit 42A compares the previous position (position information closest to the current time) stored in the storage unit 44A with the received position information, and determines whether or not the position is the same as the previous time. Is determined. When the control unit 42A determines that the position is the same as the previous position (step S72; YES), the control unit 42A proceeds to the process of step S73. On the other hand, when the control unit 42A determines that the position is not the same as the previous position (step S72; NO), the process proceeds to step S74.
 (ステップS73)制御部42Aは、カウンタ値Tに1を加算し、処理をステップS75に進める。
 (ステップS74)制御部42Aは、カウンタ値Tに0を代入し、処理をステップS71に戻す。
(Step S73) The control unit 42A adds 1 to the counter value T, and the process proceeds to step S75.
(Step S74) The control unit 42A assigns 0 to the counter value T, and returns the process to step S71.
 (ステップS75)制御部42Aは、カウンタ値Tが、所定動作が行われたか否かを判別する際に用いられる閾値より大きいか否かを判別する。制御部42Aは、カウンタ値Tが閾値より大きいと判別した場合(ステップS75;YES)、処理をステップS76に進める。一方、制御部42Aは、カウンタ値Tが閾値以下であると判別した場合(ステップS75;NO)、処理をステップS71に戻す。
 (ステップS76)制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2を所持する子供が所定位置で一時停止したと判別する。
(Step S75) The control unit 42A determines whether or not the counter value T is larger than a threshold value used when determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed. When the control unit 42A determines that the counter value T is larger than the threshold value (step S75; YES), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S76. On the other hand, when the control unit 42A determines that the counter value T is equal to or less than the threshold value (step S75; NO), the control unit 42A returns the process to step S71.
(Step S76) The control unit 42A determines that the child carrying the first mobile terminal 2 has paused at a predetermined position.
 なお、制御部42Aは、一時停止の動作分析を、第1携帯端末2の加速度センサ28の検出値に基づいて行ってもよい。
 この場合、ステップS71において、制御部42Aは加速度センサ28の検出値を受信する。そして、ステップS72において、制御部42Aは前回の検出値と今回の検出値との差がゼロを含む所定範囲内の場合に、同じ位置であると判別してもよい。
 なお、制御部42Aは、子供が所定の動作を行ったか否かを、加速度センサ28の検出値と、他の情報(例えば、レーダ22が出力する検知信号など)との少なくとも1つに基づいて検出してもよい。
Note that the control unit 42A may perform the operation analysis of the suspension based on the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 of the first portable terminal 2.
In this case, in step S71, the control unit 42A receives the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28. In step S72, the control unit 42A may determine that the position is the same when the difference between the previous detection value and the current detection value is within a predetermined range including zero.
The control unit 42A determines whether or not the child has performed a predetermined operation based on at least one of the detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 and other information (for example, a detection signal output by the radar 22). It may be detected.
 次に、所定位置における左右確認の動作分析方法の例を説明する。
 図18は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置における左右確認の動作分析方法の処理手順例のフローチャートである。なお、制御部42Aは、以下の処理を所定位置で行う。
Next, an example of a motion analysis method for checking the left and right at a predetermined position will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a processing procedure example of the motion analysis method for checking the left and right at a predetermined position according to the first modification of the embodiment. Note that the control unit 42A performs the following processing at a predetermined position.
 (ステップS81)データセンター4Aの制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2からレーダ22が出力する検知信号を受信する。
 (ステップS82)制御部42Aは、受信した検知信号から周知の手法によって第1携帯端末2の携帯者の顔部を検出する。続けて、制御部42Aは、検出した顔部の検知信号を取得した時刻情報に関連付けて記憶部44Aに記憶させる。
(Step S81) The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the detection signal output from the radar 22 from the first portable terminal 2.
(Step S <b> 82) The control unit 42 </ b> A detects the face portion of the person who carries the first portable terminal 2 from the received detection signal by a known method. Subsequently, the control unit 42A stores the detected face detection signal in the storage unit 44A in association with the acquired time information.
 (ステップS83)制御部42Aは、記憶部44Aに記憶させた顔部の検知信号に基づいて、取得した顔部の検知信号と、前回の顔部の検知信号とを比較する。制御部42Aは、比較した結果、顔部が左右に動いているか否かを判別する。制御部42Aは、顔部が左右に動いていると判別した場合(ステップS83;YES)、処理をステップS84に進める。一方、制御部42Aは、顔部が左右に動いていないと判別した場合(ステップS83;NO)、処理をステップS85に進める。 (Step S83) The control unit 42A compares the acquired face detection signal with the previous face detection signal based on the face detection signal stored in the storage unit 44A. As a result of the comparison, the control unit 42A determines whether or not the face portion is moving left and right. When the control unit 42A determines that the face part is moving left and right (step S83; YES), the process proceeds to step S84. On the other hand, when the control unit 42A determines that the face portion has not moved left and right (step S83; NO), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S85.
 (ステップS84)制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が左右確認を行った(左右確認OK)と判別する。
 (ステップS85)制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が左右確認を行っていない(左右確認NG)と判別する。
(Step S <b> 84) The control unit 42 </ b> A determines that the carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 has confirmed left and right (right and left confirmation OK).
(Step S85) 42 A of control parts discriminate | determine that the holder of the 1st portable terminal 2 has not performed right-and-left confirmation (left-right confirmation NG).
 なお、左右確認の処理においても、制御部42Aは、加速度センサ28の検出値に基づいて、検出値の左右方向の値が所定値以上変化している場合に顔部が左右に動いたか否かを判別してもよい。
 なお、制御部42Aは、携帯者が所定の動作を行ったか否かを、加速度センサ28の検出値と、他の情報(例えば、レーダ22が出力する検知信号など)との少なくとも1つに基づいて検出してもよい。
Even in the left / right confirmation process, the control unit 42A determines whether or not the face has moved to the left or right when the left / right value of the detected value changes by a predetermined value or more based on the detected value of the acceleration sensor 28. May be determined.
Note that the control unit 42A determines whether or not the user has performed a predetermined operation based on at least one of a detection value of the acceleration sensor 28 and other information (for example, a detection signal output by the radar 22). May be detected.
 以下に、所定位置における手挙げ動作の動作分析方法の例を説明する。
 図19は、実施形態の第1変形例に係る所定位置における手挙げ動作の動作分析方法の処理手順例のフローチャートである。なお、制御部42Aは、以下の処理を所定位置で行う。
Below, the example of the operation | movement analysis method of the hand raising operation | movement in a predetermined position is demonstrated.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an example of a processing procedure of an operation analysis method for a hand raising operation at a predetermined position according to the first modification of the embodiment. Note that the control unit 42A performs the following processing at a predetermined position.
 (ステップS91)データセンター4Aの制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2からレーダ22が出力する検知信号を受信する。
 (ステップS92)制御部42Aは、受信した検知信号から周知の手法によって第1携帯端末2の所持者の腕部を検出する。制御部42Aは、検出した腕部の検知信号を取得した時刻情報に関連付けて記憶部44Aに記憶させる。
(Step S91) The control unit 42A of the data center 4A receives the detection signal output from the radar 22 from the first portable terminal 2.
(Step S <b> 92) The control unit 42 </ b> A detects the arm portion of the holder of the first portable terminal 2 from the received detection signal by a known method. The control unit 42A stores the detected arm detection signal in the storage unit 44A in association with the acquired time information.
 (ステップS93)制御部42Aは、腕部を検出できたか否かにより、腕が挙がっているか否かを判別する。制御部42Aは、腕が挙がっていると判別した場合(ステップS93;YES)、処理をステップS94に進める。一方、制御部42Aは、腕が挙がっていない(腕を検出できない)と判別した場合(ステップS93;NO)、処理をステップS95に進める。 (Step S93) The control unit 42A determines whether or not the arm is raised depending on whether or not the arm portion has been detected. When it is determined that the arm is raised (step S93; YES), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S94. On the other hand, when it is determined that the arm is not raised (the arm cannot be detected) (step S93; NO), the control unit 42A advances the process to step S95.
 (ステップS94)制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が手挙げ動作を行った(手挙げOK)と判別する。
 (ステップS95)制御部42Aは、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が手挙げ動作を行っていない(手挙げNG)と判別する。
(Step S94) 42 A of control parts discriminate | determine that the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 performed hand raising operation (hand raising OK).
(Step S95) 42 A of control parts discriminate | determine that the carrier of the 1st portable terminal 2 is not performing hand raising operation (hand raising NG).
 以上のように、実施形態の第1変形例では、通学路において、例えば交通安全上、必要な行動を行ったか否かを判定してスコアで提示する。これにより、第1携帯端末2を携帯する子供は、あきず、楽しみながらスコアを上げようとする。このため、実施形態の第1変形例によれば、第1携帯端末2を携帯する子供に対して、継続的に交通安全教育に行うことができる。また、実施形態の第1変形例では、第1携帯端末2を携帯する子供の行動及びスコアを、保護者が所持する第2携帯端末3へ送信するので、保護者が子供のスキルを把握することができる。実施形態の第1変形例によれば、保護者と子供とが、第2携帯端末3に表示される情報を見ながら、コミュニケーションすることで、保護者と子供とのコミュニケーションの機会を増やし、さらなる安全意識向上も同時にはかれる。 As described above, in the first modification of the embodiment, it is determined whether a necessary action has been performed on the school road, for example, for traffic safety, and presented as a score. As a result, the child carrying the first mobile terminal 2 tries to raise the score while having fun. For this reason, according to the 1st modification of embodiment, it can carry out to a road safety education continuously with respect to the child who carries the 1st portable terminal 2. FIG. In the first modification of the embodiment, since the behavior and score of the child carrying the first mobile terminal 2 are transmitted to the second mobile terminal 3 possessed by the guardian, the guardian grasps the skill of the child. be able to. According to the first modification of the embodiment, the guardian and the child can communicate with each other while viewing the information displayed on the second mobile terminal 3, thereby increasing the chance of communication between the guardian and the child. At the same time, safety awareness is improved.
 以下に、第1携帯端末2と、第1携帯端末2の携帯者である子供とのコミュニケーションの例を図11の符号g100が示す図を参照して説明する。 Hereinafter, an example of communication between the first mobile terminal 2 and a child who is a carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 will be described with reference to a diagram indicated by reference sign g100 in FIG.
 子供は、例えば帰宅したとき、「ただいま!」と発話する。
 第1携帯端末2の制御部29は、マイクロフォン23が収音したこの音声信号を通信部21によってデータセンター4Aへ送信する。データセンター4Aの音声認識部46は、受信した音声信号に対して音声認識処理を行う。制御部42Aは、音声認識処理された結果に基づいて返答の音声信号を生成して、生成した音声信号を通信部41によって第1携帯端末2へ送信する。この結果、第1携帯端末2の制御部29は、データセンター4Aから受信した「おかえりなさい!」を再生することで発話する。
For example, when the child returns home, he / she utters “Now!”.
The control unit 29 of the first portable terminal 2 transmits this audio signal picked up by the microphone 23 to the data center 4 </ b> A through the communication unit 21. The voice recognition unit 46 of the data center 4A performs voice recognition processing on the received voice signal. The control unit 42A generates a reply voice signal based on the result of the voice recognition process, and transmits the generated voice signal to the first portable terminal 2 by the communication unit 41. As a result, the control unit 29 of the first portable terminal 2 speaks by reproducing “Return!” Received from the data center 4A.
 続けて、子供が「今日の点数は?」と発話した音声信号をデータセンター4Aが受信し、制御部42Aは音声認識された結果と、シナリオ記憶部47及び記憶部44が記憶する情報とに基づいて、返答である「90点」の音声信号を生成する。制御部42Aは返答である音声信号を通信部41によって第1携帯端末2へ送信する。この結果、第1携帯端末2の制御部29は、データセンター4Aから受信した「90点」を発話する。 Subsequently, the data center 4A receives the voice signal that the child uttered “What is today's score?”, And the control unit 42A receives the voice recognition result and the information stored in the scenario storage unit 47 and the storage unit 44. Based on this, a “90 points” audio signal as a response is generated. The control unit 42A transmits an audio signal as a response to the first portable terminal 2 through the communication unit 41. As a result, the control unit 29 of the first mobile terminal 2 utters “90 points” received from the data center 4A.
 このように上記のコミュニケーションの例では、第1携帯端末2が収音した音声信号をデータセンター4Aへ送信し、データセンター4Aが受信した音声信号の応答を第1携帯端末2へ送信する。これにより、第1携帯端末2を携帯する子供と、第1携帯端末2との間でコミュニケーションを行うことができ、第1携帯端末2を携帯する子供に対して、継続的に交通安全教育に行うことができる。 Thus, in the above communication example, the audio signal collected by the first portable terminal 2 is transmitted to the data center 4A, and the response of the audio signal received by the data center 4A is transmitted to the first portable terminal 2. Thereby, it is possible to communicate between the child carrying the first portable terminal 2 and the first portable terminal 2, and continuously providing traffic safety education to the child carrying the first portable terminal 2. It can be carried out.
 なお、データセンター4Aが第1携帯端末2へ送信する音声信号は、スコアが例えば70以上の場合に「よくがんばったね!」、スコアが例えば50以下の場合に「一時停止しなかったね。明日は一時停止しようね。」等であってもよい。 The audio signal transmitted from the data center 4A to the first mobile terminal 2 is “I did well!” When the score is 70 or more, for example, and “I did not pause when the score is 50 or less. Tomorrow. "Let's pause."
 以下に、保護者と子供と第1携帯端末2とのコミュニケーションの例を図11の符号g110が示す図を参照して説明する。 Hereinafter, an example of communication between the guardian, the child, and the first portable terminal 2 will be described with reference to a diagram indicated by reference numeral g110 in FIG.
 この例の場合、保護者と子供は、第2携帯端末3に表示された画像を見ながら交通安全ポイント確認を行うため会話を行う。
 この例でも、第1携帯端末2又は第2携帯端末3は、収音した音声信号をデータセンター4Aへ送信する。データセンター4Aは、音声認識した結果に基づいてアドバイスの音声信号を第1携帯端末2へ送信する。この結果、第1携帯端末2は、アドバイスの音声信号「一時停止はOKだから手挙げだけね!」を再生する。
 なお、データセンター4Aは、このようなアドバイスの音声信号を第2携帯端末3へも送信するようにしてもよい。
In this example, the guardian and the child have a conversation to confirm the traffic safety point while viewing the image displayed on the second portable terminal 3.
Also in this example, the first portable terminal 2 or the second portable terminal 3 transmits the collected audio signal to the data center 4A. The data center 4 </ b> A transmits an audio signal of advice to the first mobile terminal 2 based on the result of the voice recognition. As a result, the first portable terminal 2 reproduces the advice audio signal “Please pause only because the pause is OK!”.
The data center 4 </ b> A may also transmit such advice audio signals to the second portable terminal 3.
 このように上記のコミュニケーションの例では、第1携帯端末2又は第2携帯端末3が収音した音声信号をデータセンター4Aへ送信し、データセンター4Aが受信した音声信号の応答を第1携帯端末2へ送信する。これにより、保護者と子供と第1携帯端末2であるロボットとの間でコミュニケーションを行うことができ、第1携帯端末2を携帯する子供に対して、継続的に交通安全教育に行うことができる。 As described above, in the above communication example, the voice signal picked up by the first portable terminal 2 or the second portable terminal 3 is transmitted to the data center 4A, and the response of the voice signal received by the data center 4A is sent to the first portable terminal. 2 to send. Thereby, communication can be performed between the guardian, the child, and the robot that is the first portable terminal 2, and the child carrying the first portable terminal 2 can be continuously provided for traffic safety education. it can.
 なお、上記の実施形態では、第1携帯端末2を子供が携帯する例を説明したが、第1携帯端末2を例えば移動者、歩行者又は高齢者が携帯してもよい。 In the above embodiment, an example in which a child carries the first portable terminal 2 has been described. However, for example, a mobile person, a pedestrian, or an elderly person may carry the first portable terminal 2.
<情報通信システムの第2変形例>
 以下に、予め定められた地理的位置を、第1携帯端末2を携帯する携帯者に報知する処理の詳細について説明する。なお、上述した実施形態又は第1変形例と同様の構成については、同一の符号を付して説明を省略又は簡略化する。なお、地理的位置は、上述した危険箇所及び所定位置を含む位置の情報であってもよい。
<Second Modification of Information Communication System>
Below, the detail of the process which alert | reports the predetermined geographical position to the holder who carries the 1st portable terminal 2 is demonstrated. In addition, about the structure similar to embodiment mentioned above or a 1st modification, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted or simplified. The geographical position may be information on a position including the above-described dangerous place and a predetermined position.
 図20は、実施形態の第2変形例に係る情報通信システム1Bの構成の一例を示す図である。図20に示される通り、情報通信システム1Bは、第1携帯端末2と、第2携帯端末3と、データセンター4Bと、サーバ5とを備える。データセンター4Bは、通信部41と、制御部42Bと、モデル記憶部43と、記憶部44Bと、音声認識モデル記憶部45と、音声認識部46と、シナリオ記憶部47とを備える。 FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of an information communication system 1B according to a second modification of the embodiment. As illustrated in FIG. 20, the information communication system 1 </ b> B includes a first mobile terminal 2, a second mobile terminal 3, a data center 4 </ b> B, and a server 5. The data center 4B includes a communication unit 41, a control unit 42B, a model storage unit 43, a storage unit 44B, a voice recognition model storage unit 45, a voice recognition unit 46, and a scenario storage unit 47.
 記憶部44Bは、例えば、HDD、フラッシュメモリ、EEPROM(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory)、ROM(Read Only Memory)又はRAM(Random Access Memory)などを備える。記憶部44Bは、例えば、地図情報と、危険情報と、不審者情報と、地理的位置情報とを記憶する。なお、不審者情報は、不審者が現れた位置情報及び時刻等に加えて、不審者パターンを含む。不審者パターンは、不審者の行動及び挙動の特徴を示す情報である。地理的位置情報の詳細については、後述する。 The storage unit 44B includes, for example, an HDD, a flash memory, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), or a RAM (Random Access Memory). The storage unit 44B stores, for example, map information, danger information, suspicious person information, and geographical position information. The suspicious person information includes a suspicious person pattern in addition to the position information and time at which the suspicious person appears. The suspicious person pattern is information indicating the characteristics of the behavior and behavior of the suspicious person. Details of the geographical location information will be described later.
 制御部42Bは、例えば、報知部421を機能部として備える。制御部42Bは、例えば、CPU(Central Processing Unit)などのハードウェアプロセッサが記憶部44Bに格納されたプログラム(ソフトウェア)を実行することにより実現される。また、これらの構成要素のうち一部又は全部は、LSI(Large Scale Integration)、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit)、FPGA(Field-Programmable Gate Array)及びGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)などのハードウェア(回路部;circuitryを含む)によって実現されてもよいし、ソフトウェアとハードウェアの協働によって実現されてもよい。 The control unit 42B includes, for example, a notification unit 421 as a functional unit. The control unit 42B is realized by, for example, a hardware processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) executing a program (software) stored in the storage unit 44B. Some or all of these components include hardware (circuitry) such as LSI (Large Scale Integration), ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array), and GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). Part (including circuit)), or may be realized by cooperation of software and hardware.
 報知部421は、第1携帯端末2の位置情報と、地理的位置情報とに基づいて、地理的位置の接近を、第1携帯端末2を保持する携帯者(例えば、子供などの児童)に報知する。地理的位置情報は、地理的位置を示す情報である。地理的位置は、第1携帯端末2の携帯者が通行する経路上の位置であり、例えば子供に危険が及ぶ可能性が有る位置などである。地理的位置は、例えば、経路上の交差点、車道と区分された歩道上の位置及び危険性がある構造物の近傍等を含む。地理的位置は、例えば停止動作、左右確認動作及び挙手動作などの所定動作の実行が必要とされる地点(例えば、安全確認地点など)を含む。
 なお、以下の説明において、地理的位置情報には子供の登下校時に歩行する経路上の地理的位置が含まれる場合について説明する。
Based on the position information of the first mobile terminal 2 and the geographical position information, the notification unit 421 informs the carrier (for example, a child such as a child) who holds the first mobile terminal 2 about the approach of the geographical position. Inform. The geographical position information is information indicating the geographical position. The geographical position is a position on a route through which the carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 passes, for example, a position where there is a possibility of danger to children. The geographical position includes, for example, an intersection on a route, a position on a sidewalk separated from a roadway, and the vicinity of a dangerous structure. The geographical position includes a point (for example, a safety confirmation point) where execution of a predetermined operation such as a stop operation, a left / right confirmation operation, and a hand raising operation is required.
In the following description, a case will be described in which the geographical position information includes a geographical position on a route where a child walks when going to and from school.
 第1携帯端末2は、例えば、位置検出部24によって衛星などから受信した測位信号に基づいて、第1携帯端末2の位置(つまり、子供の位置)を特定し、特定した位置を示す位置情報をデータセンター4Bに送信する。 For example, the first portable terminal 2 identifies the position of the first portable terminal 2 (that is, the position of the child) based on the positioning signal received from the satellite or the like by the position detection unit 24, and position information indicating the identified position. Is transmitted to the data center 4B.
 なお、情報通信システム1Bは、子供の位置を特定することができる手法であれば、位置検出部24以外の手法を採用してもよい。例えば、第1携帯端末2は、BLE(Bluetooth(登録商標)Low Energy)、PDR(Pedestrian Dead Reckoning)、IMES(IndoorMEssaging System)、SLAM(Simultaneous Localization and Mapping)等の手法によって、第1携帯端末2の位置を特定してもよい。第1携帯端末2は、レーダ22によって検知された周辺の情報に基づいて、第1携帯端末2の位置を特定してもよい。情報通信システム1Bは、例えば、第1携帯端末2の位置を特定する他のシステムから第1携帯端末2の位置を取得してもよい。例えば、他のシステムは、地理的位置に設置される検出装置を備え、検出装置が自装置の近傍に存在する第1携帯端末2を検出することによって、第1携帯端末2の位置を特定してもよい。 Note that the information communication system 1B may adopt a method other than the position detection unit 24 as long as it can identify the position of the child. For example, the first mobile terminal 2 may be connected to the first mobile terminal 2 by a method such as BLE (Bluetooth (registered trademark) Low Energy), PDR (Pedestrian® Dead® Reckoning), IMES (Indoor Messaging System), SLAM (Simultaneous Localization and Mapping). The position of may be specified. The first portable terminal 2 may specify the position of the first portable terminal 2 based on the peripheral information detected by the radar 22. The information communication system 1B may acquire the position of the first mobile terminal 2 from another system that specifies the position of the first mobile terminal 2, for example. For example, another system includes a detection device installed at a geographical position, and the detection device detects the first mobile terminal 2 present in the vicinity of the own device, thereby specifying the position of the first mobile terminal 2. May be.
 報知部421は、第1携帯端末2から取得した第1携帯端末2の位置情報と、地理的位置情報とに基づいて、子供が地理的位置に接近している場合、第1携帯端末2が備える報知機能を制御し、子供に地理的位置の接近を報知する。第1携帯端末2が備える報知機能は、例えば、バイブレータ25及びスピーカ26等である。 When the child is approaching the geographical position based on the position information of the first mobile terminal 2 acquired from the first mobile terminal 2 and the geographical position information, the notification unit 421 determines that the first mobile terminal 2 A notification function provided is controlled to notify the child of the approach of the geographical position. The notification function with which the 1st portable terminal 2 is provided is vibrator 25, speaker 26, etc., for example.
 以下に、データセンター4Bの報知部421が、バイブレータ25の制御信号を第1携帯端末2に送信し、第1携帯端末2が当該制御信号に基づいて、バイブレータ25を動作(振動)させることにより、子供に地理的位置の接近を報知する場合について説明する。なお、以下の説明において、報知部421が、バイブレータ25の制御信号を第1携帯端末2に送信し、第1携帯端末2が当該制御信号に基づいて、バイブレータ25を振動させることを、報知部421がバイブレータ25を振動させるとも記載する。 Below, the alerting | reporting part 421 of the data center 4B transmits the control signal of the vibrator 25 to the 1st portable terminal 2, and the 1st portable terminal 2 operates (vibrates) the vibrator 25 based on the said control signal. A case where the child is notified of the approach of the geographical position will be described. In the following description, the notification unit 421 transmits a control signal for the vibrator 25 to the first mobile terminal 2, and the notification unit oscillates the vibrator 25 based on the control signal. It also describes that 421 vibrates the vibrator 25.
 図21は、実施形態の第2変形例に係る報知の開始タイミングを模式的に示す図である。図21に示される一例において、第1携帯端末2の携帯者である子供C1は、交差点の方向に直進し、交差点を右折する経路(図示する経路rt)を歩行する。地理的位置PT1は、交差点の位置に予め設定される。地理的位置PT1は、交差点の中央よりも、子供C1が歩行する経路rt上に設定されることが好ましい。例えば、車道と歩道とが区分された道において、経路rtは、歩道であり、地理的位置PT1は、歩道上(より具体的には、歩道と車道との境界)に設定される。 FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically illustrating the start timing of notification according to the second modification of the embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 21, the child C1 who is the carrier of the first mobile terminal 2 goes straight in the direction of the intersection and walks along a route that turns right at the intersection (route rt shown in the drawing). The geographical position PT1 is set in advance at the position of the intersection. The geographical position PT1 is preferably set on a route rt on which the child C1 walks rather than the center of the intersection. For example, in a road in which a roadway and a sidewalk are divided, the route rt is a sidewalk, and the geographical position PT1 is set on the sidewalk (more specifically, the boundary between the sidewalk and the roadway).
 報知部421は、地理的位置PT1から所定距離(図示する第1所定距離dt1)だけ離れた位置(つまり、図示する所定範囲ARP)まで子供C1が接近した場合、バイブレータ25を動作させる。第1所定距離dt1は、例えば、数m程度の距離である。また、報知部421は、地理的位置PT1までの距離に応じて、報知の強度(例えば、振動の強度)を変化させてもよい。子供C1は、バイブレータ25によって地理的位置PT1(つまり、交差点)を報知されることにより、周囲に注意しながら歩行する。このため、情報通信システム1Bは、子供C1と、子供C1の進行方向に進行する車両mとが接触することを抑制することができる。 The notification unit 421 operates the vibrator 25 when the child C1 approaches a position (that is, a predetermined range ARP illustrated) that is a predetermined distance (a first predetermined distance dt1 illustrated) from the geographical position PT1. The first predetermined distance dt1 is a distance of about several meters, for example. Further, the notification unit 421 may change the strength of notification (for example, the strength of vibration) according to the distance to the geographical position PT1. The child C1 walks while paying attention to the surroundings by being notified of the geographical position PT1 (that is, the intersection) by the vibrator 25. For this reason, the information communication system 1B can suppress contact between the child C1 and the vehicle m traveling in the traveling direction of the child C1.
 図22は、実施形態の第2変形例に係る報知部421の処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。
 報知部421は、図22に示される処理を、所定の時間間隔毎に実行する。
 まず、報知部421は、第1携帯端末2から子供C1の位置を示す位置情報を取得する(ステップS100)。
 次に、報知部421は、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1未満であるか否かを判定する(ステップS102)。
 報知部421は、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1未満ではない場合、処理を終了する。
 一方、報知部421は、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1未満である場合、処理をステップS104に進める。
 報知部421は、地理的位置PT1の接近を子供C1に報知する地理的位置接近報知処理を行い(ステップS104)、処理を終了する。
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing of the notification unit 421 according to the second modification of the embodiment.
The notification unit 421 executes the process shown in FIG. 22 at predetermined time intervals.
First, the alerting | reporting part 421 acquires the positional information which shows the position of the child C1 from the 1st portable terminal 2 (step S100).
Next, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1 (step S102).
When the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is not less than the first predetermined distance dt1, the notification unit 421 ends the process.
On the other hand, when the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1, the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S104.
The notification unit 421 performs a geographical position approach notification process for notifying the child C1 of the approach of the geographical position PT1 (step S104), and ends the process.
 図23は、図22に示されるステップS104の地理的位置接近報知処理の詳細を示すフローチャートである。
 まず、報知部421は、地理的位置PT1の接近を子供C1に知らせる報知を開始する(ステップS200)。この一例では、報知部421は、バイブレータ25の振動を開始させる。
 次に、報知部421は、位置検出部24によって子供C1の位置を取得する(ステップS202)。
 次に、報知部421は、ステップS100において取得した子供C1の位置と、ステップS202において取得した子供C1の位置とに基づいて、子供C1が地理的位置PT1に近づいているか否かを判定する(ステップS204)。
 報知部421は、子供C1が地理的位置PT1に近づいていると判定した場合(ステップS204のYES側)、処理をステップS206に進める。
 一方、報知部421は、子供C1が地理的位置PT1に近づいていないと判定した場合、(ステップS204のNO側)、処理をステップS208に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、バイブレータ25の報知量を増加させ(ステップS206)、処理をステップS212に進める。報知量を増加させるとは、例えば、バイブレータ25の振動を大きくすること、及び、振動の頻度を多くすることのうち、少なくともいずれかである。
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the geographical location approach notification process in step S104 shown in FIG.
First, the alerting | reporting part 421 starts the alerting | reporting which notifies the child C1 of the approach of geographical position PT1 (step S200). In this example, the notification unit 421 starts the vibration of the vibrator 25.
Next, the alerting | reporting part 421 acquires the position of the child C1 by the position detection part 24 (step S202).
Next, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the child C1 is approaching the geographical position PT1 based on the position of the child C1 acquired in step S100 and the position of the child C1 acquired in step S202 ( Step S204).
When the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 is approaching the geographical position PT1 (YES in step S204), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S206.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 has not approached the geographical position PT1 (NO side of step S204), the notification unit 421 advances the processing to step S208.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 increases the alerting | reporting amount of the vibrator 25 (step S206), and advances a process to step S212. Increasing the notification amount is, for example, at least one of increasing the vibration of the vibrator 25 and increasing the frequency of vibration.
 また、報知部421は、子供C1が地理的位置PT1から遠ざかっているか否かを判定する(ステップS208)。
 報知部421は、子供C1が地理的位置PT1から遠ざかっていると判定した場合(ステップS208のYES側)、処理をステップS210に進める。
 一方、報知部421は、子供C1が地理的位置PT1に近づいても遠ざかってもいないと判定した場合(ステップS208のNO側)、バイブレータ25の報知量を変更せず、処理をステップS212に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、バイブレータ25の報知量を減少させ(ステップS210)、処理をステップS212に進める。報知量を減少させるとは、バイブレータ25の振動を小さくすること、及び、振動の頻度を少なくすることのうち、すくなくともいずれかである。
Further, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the child C1 is away from the geographical position PT1 (step S208).
When the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 is moving away from the geographical position PT1 (YES in step S208), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S210.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the child C1 has not approached or moved away from the geographical position PT1 (NO in step S208), the notification amount of the vibrator 25 is not changed, and the process proceeds to step S212. .
And the alerting | reporting part 421 reduces the alerting | reporting amount of the vibrator 25 (step S210), and advances a process to step S212. Decreasing the notification amount is at least one of reducing vibration of the vibrator 25 and reducing the frequency of vibration.
 報知部421は、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1以上であるか否かを判定する(ステップS212)。
 報知部421は、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1未満であると判定する間(ステップS212のNO側、つまり、子供C1が所定範囲ARPの外に出るまでの間)、処理をステップS204に戻す。報知部421は、ステップS204~S210までの処理を繰り返すことによって報知量を調整する。
 一方、報知部421は、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1以上であると判定した場合(ステップS212のYES側)、処理をステップS214に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、報知を停止する(ステップS214)。
The notification unit 421 determines whether the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is equal to or greater than the first predetermined distance dt1 (step S212).
While the notification unit 421 determines that the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1 (NO in step S212, that is, until the child C1 goes out of the predetermined range ARP). The process returns to step S204. The notification unit 421 adjusts the notification amount by repeating the processing from steps S204 to S210.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is equal to or greater than the first predetermined distance dt1 (YES side of step S212), the process proceeds to step S214.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 stops alerting | reporting (step S214).
 なお、上述では、子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離が直線距離である場合について説明したが、これに限られない。子供C1の位置から地理的位置PT1までの距離は、子供C1の経路rtに沿った距離であってもよい。報知部421は、子供C1の経路rtに沿った地理的位置PT1までの距離に基づいて、報知を行うことにより、長時間報知が行われることを抑制し、子供C1が報知状態に慣れることを抑制することができる。
 以上説明したように、実施形態の第2変形例の情報通信システム1Bは、より適切に地理的位置の接近を子供C1に報知することができる。
In the above description, the case where the distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 is a linear distance has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The distance from the position of the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 may be a distance along the route rt of the child C1. The notification unit 421 suppresses the notification for a long time by performing notification based on the distance to the geographical position PT1 along the route rt of the child C1, and the child C1 gets used to the notification state. Can be suppressed.
As described above, the information communication system 1B according to the second modification of the embodiment can more appropriately notify the child C1 of the approach of the geographical position.
<情報通信システムの第3変形例>
 以下に、第1携帯端末2を携帯する携帯者に接近する物体及び人を携帯者に報知する場合について説明する。なお、上述した実施形態、第1変形例又は第2変形例と同様の構成については、同一の符号を付して説明を省略又は簡略化する。
<Third Modification of Information Communication System>
Hereinafter, a case where an object and a person approaching the person who carries the first portable terminal 2 are notified to the person who carries the first portable terminal 2 will be described. In addition, about the structure similar to embodiment mentioned above, a 1st modification, or a 2nd modification, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
 図24は、実施形態の第3変形例に係る第1携帯端末2Bの構成の一例を示す図である。図24に示される通り、第1携帯端末2Bは、通信部21と、レーダ22と、マイクロフォン23と、位置検出部24と、バイブレータ25と、スピーカ26と、表示部27と、加速度センサ28と、制御部29Bとを備える。 FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the first mobile terminal 2B according to the third modification of the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 24, the first mobile terminal 2B includes a communication unit 21, a radar 22, a microphone 23, a position detection unit 24, a vibrator 25, a speaker 26, a display unit 27, an acceleration sensor 28, and the like. And a control unit 29B.
 制御部29Bは、例えば、制御部29が備える構成に加えて接近判定部291を機能部として備える。制御部29Bは、例えば、CPUなどのハードウェアプロセッサが記憶部(不図示)に格納されたプログラム(ソフトウェア)を実行することにより実現される。また、これらの構成要素のうち一部又は全部は、LSI、ASIC、FPGA又はGPUなどのハードウェア(回路部を含む)によって実現されてもよいし、ソフトウェアとハードウェアの協働によって実現されてもよい。 The control unit 29B includes, for example, an approach determination unit 291 as a functional unit in addition to the configuration included in the control unit 29. The control unit 29B is realized, for example, when a hardware processor such as a CPU executes a program (software) stored in a storage unit (not shown). Some or all of these components may be realized by hardware (including a circuit unit) such as LSI, ASIC, FPGA, or GPU, or by cooperation of software and hardware. Also good.
 接近判定部291は、例えば、第1携帯端末2Bが備える検出機能の検出結果に基づいて、携帯者の周囲に存在する物体が携帯者に接近したか否かを判定する。以降の説明において、第1携帯端末2Bが備える検出機能がレーダ22である場合について説明する。 The approach determination unit 291 determines, for example, whether or not an object existing around the mobile person has approached the mobile person based on the detection result of the detection function provided in the first mobile terminal 2B. In the following description, a case where the detection function provided in the first mobile terminal 2B is the radar 22 will be described.
 図25は、実施形態の第3変形例に係る報知の開始タイミングを模式的に示す図である。第1携帯端末2Bが備えるレーダ22は、例えば子供C1の周囲を検知可能に構成される。レーダ22は、例えば複数(図示では2つ)のミリ波レーダによって構成され、第1携帯端末2Bの周囲(つまり、子供C1の周囲)を検知可能なように、検知方向が異なる向きに設けられる。図25に示される一例では、レーダ22が備えるフロントレーダ及びリヤレーダは、それぞれ異なる範囲(図示する前方検知範囲AF及び後方検知範囲AR)を検知する。レーダ22は、子供C1の周囲を全域(例えば、鉛直軸周りの360度の範囲など)に亘って検知可能に設定される場合、前方検知範囲AF及び後方検知範囲ARは相互に重畳してもよい。レーダ22は、例えば、所定の時間間隔毎に携帯者の周囲を検知し、検知信号を生成する。なお、レーダ22は、子供C1の周囲を検知することが可能であれば、1つ又は複数のミリ波レーダを備えてもよい。 FIG. 25 is a diagram schematically illustrating the start timing of notification according to the third modification of the embodiment. The radar 22 included in the first mobile terminal 2B is configured to be able to detect the surroundings of the child C1, for example. The radar 22 is configured by, for example, a plurality of (two in the drawing) millimeter wave radars, and is provided in different directions so that the surroundings of the first portable terminal 2B (that is, the surroundings of the child C1) can be detected. . In the example shown in FIG. 25, the front radar and the rear radar included in the radar 22 detect different ranges (a front detection range AF and a rear detection range AR shown in the drawing). When the radar 22 is set to be able to detect the entire area of the child C1 (for example, a range of 360 degrees around the vertical axis), the front detection range AF and the rear detection range AR may overlap each other. Good. For example, the radar 22 detects the surroundings of the user at predetermined time intervals and generates a detection signal. The radar 22 may include one or a plurality of millimeter wave radars as long as it can detect the surroundings of the child C1.
 なお、第1携帯端末2Bは、携帯者の周囲環境を検知する構成として、レーダ22以外の機器を備えてもよい。第1携帯端末2Bは、レーダ22の代わりに、カメラ、LIDAR(Light Detection and Ranging又はLaser Imaging Detection and Ranging)又は赤外線センサなどの遠隔的に検出を行う検出装置を備えてもよい。
 例えば、第1携帯端末2Bは、レーダ22の代わりに、1つ又は複数のカメラを備えてもよい。例えば第1携帯端末2Bに備えられる3つのカメラは、図25に示すように、それぞれ異なる範囲(図示する撮像範囲AR1~AR3)を撮像する。3つのカメラの撮像範囲AR1~AR3のそれぞれは、互いに重畳してもよい。3つのカメラは、所定の時間間隔毎に携帯者の周囲を撮像し、撮像画像(例えば、静止画像又は動画)を生成してもよい。
Note that the first mobile terminal 2B may include a device other than the radar 22 as a configuration for detecting the surrounding environment of the user. The first portable terminal 2 </ b> B may include a detection device that performs remote detection, such as a camera, a LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging or Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging), or an infrared sensor, instead of the radar 22.
For example, the first mobile terminal 2 </ b> B may include one or a plurality of cameras instead of the radar 22. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the three cameras provided in the first portable terminal 2B capture images in different ranges (imaging ranges AR1 to AR3 shown). The imaging ranges AR1 to AR3 of the three cameras may overlap each other. The three cameras may capture the periphery of the user at predetermined time intervals and generate captured images (for example, still images or moving images).
 接近判定部291は、レーダ22によって生成された検知信号に基づいて、子供C1の位置から所定距離(図示する第2所定距離dt2)だけ離れた位置(つまり、図示する所定範囲ARC)まで物体が接近した場合、子供C1に物体が接近したと判定し、レーダ22の検知信号をデータセンター4Bに送信する。第2所定距離dt2は、数m程度の距離である。 Based on the detection signal generated by the radar 22, the approach determination unit 291 moves the object to a position (that is, a predetermined range ARC shown in the drawing) that is a predetermined distance (a second predetermined distance dt2 shown in the drawing) from the position of the child C1. When approaching, it determines with the object approaching the child C1, and transmits the detection signal of the radar 22 to the data center 4B. The second predetermined distance dt2 is a distance of about several meters.
 データセンター4Bの報知部421は、第1携帯端末2Bから受信したレーダ22の検知信号に基づいて、子供C1に物体が接近している場合、第1携帯端末2Bが備える報知機能を制御し、子供C1に物体の接近を報知する。報知部421は、子供C1に接近する物体のうち、車両mの接近と、不審者の接近とを子供C1に報知する。 The notification unit 421 of the data center 4B controls the notification function provided in the first mobile terminal 2B when an object is approaching the child C1, based on the detection signal of the radar 22 received from the first mobile terminal 2B. Inform child C1 of the approach of the object. The notification unit 421 notifies the child C1 of the approach of the vehicle m and the approach of the suspicious person among the objects approaching the child C1.
 図26は、実施形態の第3変形例に係る接近判定部291及び報知部421の処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。
 まず、接近判定部291は、レーダ22によって出力された検知信号を取得する(ステップS300)。
 次に、接近判定部291は、取得した検知信号に基づいて、子供C1から検知される物体までの距離が第2所定距離dt2未満であるか否かを判定する(ステップS302)。
 接近判定部291は、子供C1から検知される物体までの距離が第2所定距離dt2未満ではないと判定する場合(ステップS302のNO側)、処理をステップS300に戻して、待機する。
 一方、接近判定部291は、子供C1から検知される物体までの距離が第2所定距離dt2未満であると判定する場合(ステップS302のYES側)、処理をステップS304に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、物体の接近を子供C1に報知する物体接近報知処理を行い(ステップS304)、処理を終了する。
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing of the approach determination unit 291 and the notification unit 421 according to the third modification example of the embodiment.
First, the approach determination unit 291 acquires the detection signal output by the radar 22 (step S300).
Next, the approach determination unit 291 determines whether or not the distance from the child C1 to the detected object is less than the second predetermined distance dt2 based on the acquired detection signal (step S302).
When determining that the distance from the child C1 to the detected object is not less than the second predetermined distance dt2 (NO side of step S302), the approach determination unit 291 returns the process to step S300 and waits.
On the other hand, when the approach determination unit 291 determines that the distance from the child C1 to the detected object is less than the second predetermined distance dt2 (YES side of step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 performs the object approach alerting | reporting process which alert | reports the approach of an object to the child C1 (step S304), and complete | finishes a process.
 図27は、図26に示されるステップS304の物体接近報知処理の詳細を示すフローチャートである。
 まず、報知部421は、ステップS300において取得された検知信号に示される物体の大きさが所定の大きさ以上であるか否かを判定する(ステップS400)。所定の大きさは、例えば、一般的な適宜の車両の大きさである。
 報知部421は、検知信号に示される物体の大きさが所定の大きさ以上であると判定した場合(ステップS400のYES側)、処理をステップS402に進める。
 一方、報知部421は、物体の大きさが所定の大きさ以上ではないと判定した場合、処理をステップS410に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、物体が車両mであると判定する(ステップS402)。
 次に、報知部421は、ステップS300において取得された検知信号よりも後に出力された検知信号を取得する(ステップS404)。
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the object approach notification process in step S304 shown in FIG.
First, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the size of the object indicated in the detection signal acquired in step S300 is greater than or equal to a predetermined size (step S400). The predetermined size is, for example, a general appropriate vehicle size.
When the notification unit 421 determines that the size of the object indicated by the detection signal is equal to or larger than the predetermined size (YES side of step S400), the process proceeds to step S402.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the size of the object is not equal to or larger than the predetermined size, the notification unit 421 advances the processing to step S410.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 determines with an object being the vehicle m (step S402).
Next, the notification unit 421 acquires a detection signal output after the detection signal acquired in step S300 (step S404).
 次に、報知部421は、ステップS300において取得された検知信号と、ステップS404において取得された検知信号とに基づいて、車両mの速度が所定速度以上であるか否かを判定する(ステップS406)。所定速度は、例えば、数~数十km/h程度の速度である。
 報知部421は、車両mの速度が所定速度以上ではない場合(ステップS406のNO側)、処理をステップS408に進める。
 一方、報知部421は、車両mの速度が所定の速度以上であると判定した場合(ステップS406のYES側)、処理をステップS412に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、車両mが子供C1の近傍を通過し終えたか否かを判定する(ステップS408)。
 報知部421は、車両mが子供C1の近傍を通過し終えた場合(ステップS408のYES側)、子供C1に危険が及ばないと推定し、子供C1に車両mの接近を知らせる報知を開始せず、処理を終了する。
 一方、報知部421は、車両mが子供C1の近傍を通過し終えていないと判定する場合(ステップS408のNO側)、処理をステップS404に戻す。報知部421は、ステップS404~S406を繰り返す際に、子供C1に接近する車両mが所定速度以上ではない場合(ステップS406のNO側)、接近しても子供C1に危険が及ばないと推定し、報知を開始しない。
Next, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the speed of the vehicle m is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed based on the detection signal acquired in step S300 and the detection signal acquired in step S404 (step S406). ). The predetermined speed is, for example, about several to several tens km / h.
When the speed of the vehicle m is not equal to or higher than the predetermined speed (NO side of step S406), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S408.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the speed of the vehicle m is equal to or higher than the predetermined speed (YES side of step S406), the process proceeds to step S412.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 determines whether the vehicle m finished passing the vicinity of the child C1 (step S408).
When the vehicle m has passed the vicinity of the child C1 (YES in step S408), the notification unit 421 estimates that there is no danger to the child C1 and starts to notify the child C1 of the approach of the vehicle m. The process ends.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the vehicle m has not passed through the vicinity of the child C1 (NO side of step S408), the notification unit 421 returns the process to step S404. When repeating steps S404 to S406, when the vehicle m approaching the child C1 is not equal to or higher than the predetermined speed (NO side of step S406), the notification unit 421 estimates that the child C1 is not dangerous even if approaching. , Do not start notification.
 また、報知部421は、物体の移動パターンが不審者のパターンと合致するか否かを判定する(ステップS410)。不審者のパターンは、例えば、子供C1の移動に係る単位期間中(例えば、適宜の日の登校中又は下校中等)に、所定回数以上に亘って特定の物体に遭遇するパターンである。また、不審者のパターンは、例えば、子供C1の移動に係る単位期間中に、子供C1の移動経路に合致する経路において物体が往復移動するパターンである。また、不審者のパターンは、例えば、物体の特徴が不審者情報の不審者の特徴と合致するパターンである。
 報知部421は、物体の移動パターンが不審者のパターンと合致しないと判定した場合(ステップS410のNO側)、物体が不審者ではないと推定し、子供C1に物体の接近を知らせる報知を開始せず、処理を終了する。
 一方、報知部421は、物体の移動パターンが不審者のパターンと合致する(ステップS410のYES側、つまり、物体が不審者である)と判定した場合、処理をステップS412に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、車両m又は不審者の接近を子供C1に知らせる報知を開始する(ステップS412)。
Also, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the movement pattern of the object matches the suspicious person's pattern (step S410). The suspicious person's pattern is, for example, a pattern in which a specific object is encountered a predetermined number of times or more during a unit period related to the movement of the child C1 (for example, when attending school or leaving school on an appropriate day). The suspicious person's pattern is a pattern in which an object reciprocates along a path that matches the movement path of the child C1 during a unit period related to the movement of the child C1, for example. The suspicious person's pattern is, for example, a pattern in which the feature of the object matches the suspicious person's feature of the suspicious person information.
When the notification unit 421 determines that the movement pattern of the object does not match the pattern of the suspicious person (NO side of step S410), the notification unit 421 estimates that the object is not a suspicious person and starts notification that notifies the child C1 of the approach of the object. Without processing, the process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 determines that the movement pattern of the object matches the suspicious person's pattern (YES in step S410, that is, the object is a suspicious person), the notification unit 421 advances the processing to step S412.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 starts the alerting | reporting which notifies the child m1 of the approach of the vehicle m or a suspicious person (step S412).
 次に、報知部421は、ステップS300において取得された検知信号よりも後に出力された検知信号を取得する(ステップS414)。
 次に、報知部421は、ステップS300において取得された検知信号と、ステップS414において取得された検知信号とに基づいて、車両m又は不審者が子供C1に近づいているか否かを判定する(ステップS416)。
 報知部421は、車両m又は不審者が子供C1に近づいている場合(ステップS410のYES側)、処理をステップS418に進める。
 一方、報知部421は、車両m又は不審者が子供C1に近づいていない場合(ステップS410のNO側)、処理をステップS420に進める。
Next, the alerting | reporting part 421 acquires the detection signal output after the detection signal acquired in step S300 (step S414).
Next, the notification unit 421 determines whether the vehicle m or the suspicious person is approaching the child C1 based on the detection signal acquired in Step S300 and the detection signal acquired in Step S414 (Step S414). S416).
Informing part 421 advances processing to Step S418, when vehicle m or a suspicious person is approaching child C1 (YES side of Step S410).
On the other hand, when the vehicle m or the suspicious person is not approaching the child C1 (NO side of step S410), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S420.
 そして、報知部421は、報知量を増加させ(ステップS418)、処理をステップS416に戻す。
 また、報知部421は、車両m又は不審者が子供C1の近傍を通過し終えたか否かを判定する(ステップS420)。
 報知部421は、車両m又は不審者が子供C1の近傍を通過し終えていないと判定する場合(ステップS420のNO側)、処理をステップS416に戻し、ステップS416~S418の処理を繰り返す。
 一方、報知部421は、車両m又は不審者が子供C1の近傍を通過し終えた場合(ステップS420のYES側)、処理をステップS422に進める。
 報知部421は、報知を停止する(ステップS422)。
Then, the notification unit 421 increases the notification amount (step S418) and returns the process to step S416.
Further, the notification unit 421 determines whether or not the vehicle m or the suspicious person has passed near the child C1 (step S420).
When the notification unit 421 determines that the vehicle m or the suspicious person has not passed near the child C1 (NO side of step S420), the notification unit 421 returns the process to step S416 and repeats the processes of steps S416 to S418.
On the other hand, when the vehicle m or the suspicious person has passed the vicinity of the child C1 (YES side of step S420), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S422.
The notification unit 421 stops the notification (step S422).
 以上説明したように、実施形態の第3変形例に係る情報通信システム1Bは、より適切に車両又は不審者の接近を子供C1に報知することができる。 As described above, the information communication system 1B according to the third modification of the embodiment can more appropriately notify the child C1 of the approach of the vehicle or the suspicious person.
<情報通信システムの第4変形例>
 以下に、地理的位置おける携帯者の所定動作を認識する場合について説明する。なお、上述した実施形態、第1変形例、第2変形例又は第3変形例と同様の構成については、同一の符号を付して説明を省略又は簡略化する。
<Fourth Modification of Information Communication System>
In the following, a case will be described in which a predetermined movement of the user at the geographical position is recognized. In addition, about the structure similar to embodiment mentioned above, a 1st modification, a 2nd modification, or a 3rd modification, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
 図28は、実施形態の第4変形例に係る第1携帯端末2Cの構成の一例を示す図である。実施形態の第4変形例に係る情報通信システム1Bは、第1携帯端末2Bに代えて、又は、第1携帯端末2Bに加えて、第1携帯端末2Cを備える。
 図28に示される通り、第1携帯端末2Cは、通信部21と、レーダ22と、マイクロフォン23と、位置検出部24と、バイブレータ25と、スピーカ26と、表示部27と、加速度センサ28と、制御部29Cとを備える。制御部29Cは、例えば、制御部29が備える構成に加えて、接近判定部291と動作認識部292とを機能部として備える。
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the first mobile terminal 2C according to the fourth modification example of the embodiment. The information communication system 1B according to the fourth modification of the embodiment includes a first mobile terminal 2C instead of the first mobile terminal 2B or in addition to the first mobile terminal 2B.
As shown in FIG. 28, the first mobile terminal 2C includes a communication unit 21, a radar 22, a microphone 23, a position detection unit 24, a vibrator 25, a speaker 26, a display unit 27, an acceleration sensor 28, and the like. And a control unit 29C. 29 C of control parts are provided with the approach determination part 291 and the action recognition part 292 as a function part in addition to the structure with which the control part 29 is provided, for example.
 動作認識部292は、例えば、第1携帯端末2Cが備える検出機能(この一例では、レーダ22)の検出結果に基づいて、携帯者が所定動作を行ったか否かを認識する。所定動作は、地理的位置において、携帯者が行うことが好ましい動作である。所定動作は、例えば、地理的位置において停止する停止動作である。また、所定動作は、例えば、地理的位置において左右を確認する左右確認動作である。また、所定動作は、例えば、地理的位置において手を挙げる挙手動作である。
 レーダ22の検知範囲は、携帯者の頭部の可動範囲及び携帯者の手部の可動範囲を含む。動作認識部292は、レーダ22によって出力された検知信号に基づいて、携帯者によって行われた所定動作を認識し、認識された所定動作を示す情報をデータセンター4Bに送信する。
For example, the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes whether or not the wearer has performed a predetermined motion based on the detection result of the detection function (radar 22 in this example) included in the first mobile terminal 2C. The predetermined operation is an operation that is preferably performed by the wearer at the geographical location. The predetermined operation is, for example, a stop operation that stops at a geographical position. The predetermined operation is, for example, a left / right confirmation operation for confirming left / right at a geographical position. Further, the predetermined operation is, for example, a hand raising operation at a geographical position.
The detection range of the radar 22 includes the movable range of the portable person's head and the movable range of the portable person's hand. The motion recognition unit 292 recognizes a predetermined motion performed by the carrier based on the detection signal output by the radar 22, and transmits information indicating the recognized predetermined motion to the data center 4B.
 図29は、実施形態の第4変形例に係る所定動作の認識処理を行うタイミングを模式的に示す図である。上述したように、第1携帯端末2Cは、地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1未満の位置(図示する、「時刻tの子供C1」の位置)において、バイブレータ25によって報知を開始する。図29に示される一例において、子供C1は、地理的位置PT1において停止する停止動作を行う。以下、動作認識部292が各種の所定動作を認識する場合の処理について説明する。 FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically illustrating timing for performing recognition processing of a predetermined action according to the fourth modification example of the embodiment. As described above, the first mobile terminal 2C starts notification by the vibrator 25 at a position where the distance to the geographical position PT1 is less than the first predetermined distance dt1 (the position of “child C1 at time t” shown in the figure). To do. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the child C1 performs a stop operation that stops at the geographical position PT1. Hereinafter, processing when the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes various predetermined motions will be described.
 <停止動作を認識する場合>
 動作認識部292は、位置検出部24によって取得された位置情報を、データセンター4Bに送信する。データセンター4Bは、記憶部44Bに記憶された地理的位置情報を参照し、位置情報が示す子供C1の位置の近傍に存在する地理的位置PT1を特定する。データセンター4Bは、特定した地理的位置PT1を示す情報を第1携帯端末2Cに送信する。動作認識部292は、位置検出部24によって特定した子供C1の位置が、地理的位置PT1であるか否かを判定する。また、動作認識部292は、レーダ22によって出力された検知信号に基づいて、検知信号に取得される周囲環境に所定時間に亘って変化がない場合、子供C1が停止していると認識する。動作認識部292は、上述した判定を総合し、地理的位置PT1において、子供C1が停止している場合、停止動作を行ったと認識する。なお、動作認識部292は、地理的位置PT1から所定距離(図示する一例では、第3所定距離dt3)だけ離隔した離隔位置から地理的位置PT1までの間に停止動作を認識する処理を行ってもよい。この場合、動作認識部292は、データセンター4Bから取得した現在位置の近傍の地理的位置PT1から、第3所定距離dt3だけ手前の離隔位置を特定し、特定した離隔位置から地理的位置PT1に到着するまでの間、停止動作を認識する処理を行ってもよい。
<When recognizing stop operation>
The motion recognition unit 292 transmits the position information acquired by the position detection unit 24 to the data center 4B. The data center 4B refers to the geographical position information stored in the storage unit 44B, and specifies the geographical position PT1 existing in the vicinity of the position of the child C1 indicated by the position information. The data center 4B transmits information indicating the identified geographical position PT1 to the first mobile terminal 2C. The motion recognition unit 292 determines whether or not the position of the child C1 specified by the position detection unit 24 is the geographical position PT1. Further, based on the detection signal output by the radar 22, the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes that the child C1 is stopped when the surrounding environment acquired by the detection signal has not changed for a predetermined time. The action recognition unit 292 integrates the above-described determinations, and recognizes that the stop action has been performed when the child C1 is stopped at the geographical position PT1. Note that the motion recognition unit 292 performs a process of recognizing the stop motion from a remote position separated from the geographical position PT1 by a predetermined distance (a third predetermined distance dt3 in the illustrated example) to the geographical position PT1. Also good. In this case, the motion recognition unit 292 specifies a remote position that is a third predetermined distance dt3 in front of the geographical position PT1 in the vicinity of the current position acquired from the data center 4B, and changes the geographical position PT1 from the specified remote position. Until it arrives, processing for recognizing the stop operation may be performed.
 <左右確認動作を認識する場合>
 動作認識部292は、レーダ22によって出力された検知信号に基づいて、子供C1の頭部(例えば、顔など)が子供C1に対して左方向及び右方向に向いた場合、左右確認動作を行ったと認識する。
<When recognizing left / right confirmation action>
Based on the detection signal output by the radar 22, the motion recognition unit 292 performs a left / right confirmation operation when the head of the child C1 (for example, a face) faces leftward and rightward with respect to the child C1. Recognize that
 <挙手動作を認識する場合>
 動作認識部292は、レーダ22によって出力された検知信号に基づいて、子供C1の手部(例えば、手のひらなど)が子供C1に対して上方向に位置した場合、挙手動作を行ったと認識する。
<When recognizing raising hand>
Based on the detection signal output by the radar 22, the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes that the hand raising operation has been performed when the hand portion (for example, the palm) of the child C1 is positioned upward with respect to the child C1.
 動作認識部292は、所定動作が行われたことを認識したタイミングにおいて、所定動作が認識されたことを示す情報をデータセンター4Bに送信する。報知部421は、地理的位置の接近を子供C1に知らせる報知が開始されている場合であって、動作認識部292から所定動作が行われたことを示す情報を受信した場合、報知を停止する。 The operation recognizing unit 292 transmits information indicating that the predetermined operation is recognized to the data center 4B at the timing when it is recognized that the predetermined operation has been performed. The notification unit 421 stops the notification when the notification indicating the approach of the geographical position is started to the child C1 and when the information indicating that the predetermined operation is performed is received from the motion recognition unit 292. .
 なお、動作認識部292は、所定動作の全て(例えば、停止動作、左右確認動作及び挙手動作など)を認識可能としてもよいし、所定動作の一部のみ(例えば、左右確認動作及び挙手動作のみなど)を認識可能としてもよい。 Note that the motion recognition unit 292 may be able to recognize all of the predetermined operations (for example, stop operation, left / right confirmation operation, and raising hand operation), or only a part of the predetermined operation (for example, only the left / right confirmation operation and raising hand operation). Etc.) may be recognizable.
 図30は、実施形態の第4変形例に係る報知部421の報知の停止処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。
 まず、報知部421は、報知が開始されたか否かを判定する(ステップS500)。
 報知部421は、報知が開始されていない場合(ステップS500のNO側)、ステップS500の処理を繰り返し、報知が開始されるまでの間に待機する。
 一方、報知部421は、報知が開始されている場合(ステップS500のYES側)、処理をステップS502に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、第1携帯端末2Cから所定動作が行われたことを示す情報を受信したか否かを判定する(ステップS502)。
 報知部421は、所定動作が行われていない場合(ステップS502のNO側)、ステップS502の処理を繰り返し、所定動作が行われたことを示す情報を受信するまでの間に待機する。
 一方、報知部421は、所定動作が行われたことを示す情報を受信した場合(ステップS502のYES側)、処理をステップS504に進める。
 そして、報知部421は、報知を停止する(ステップS504)。
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of notification stop processing of the notification unit 421 according to the fourth modification of the embodiment.
First, the notification unit 421 determines whether notification has been started (step S500).
When the notification is not started (NO side of step S500), the notification unit 421 repeats the process of step S500 and waits until the notification is started.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 has started notification (YES in step S500), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S502.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 determines whether the information which shows that predetermined | prescribed operation | movement was performed from the 1st portable terminal 2C was received (step S502).
When the predetermined operation is not performed (NO side of step S502), the notification unit 421 repeats the process of step S502 and waits until receiving information indicating that the predetermined operation has been performed.
On the other hand, when the notification unit 421 receives information indicating that a predetermined operation has been performed (YES in step S502), the notification unit 421 advances the process to step S504.
And the alerting | reporting part 421 stops alerting | reporting (step S504).
 以上説明したように、実施形態の第4変形例の情報通信システム1Bは、子供C1が地理的位置において所定動作を行った場合、交通安全上、必要な行動が行われたと推定し、不要に報知が継続されることを抑制することができる。 As described above, the information communication system 1B according to the fourth modified example of the embodiment estimates that a necessary action has been performed for traffic safety when the child C1 performs a predetermined operation at a geographical position, and is unnecessary. It is possible to prevent the notification from being continued.
<報知手法について>
 なお、上述した第2変形例から第4変形例において、報知部421がバイブレータ25を振動させることにより、子供C1に各種報知を行う場合について説明したが、これに限られない。報知は、例えば、スピーカ26が音声を出力することによって行われてもよい。この場合、報知量を増加させるとは、例えば、音声の音量を大きくすること、及び、音声出力の頻度を多くすることのうち、少なくともいずれかである。
<Notification method>
In addition, although the notification part 421 performed various notifications to the child C1 by vibrating the vibrator 25 in the second to fourth modifications described above, the present invention is not limited to this. The notification may be performed, for example, when the speaker 26 outputs sound. In this case, increasing the notification amount is, for example, at least one of increasing the sound volume and increasing the frequency of sound output.
<移動速度の認識について>
 また、上述した第4変形例において、動作認識部292がレーダ22によって出力された検知信号に基づいて、子供C1の移動速度を認識する場合について説明したが、これに限られない。子供C1の移動速度は、例えば、加速度センサ28の出力に基づいて、認識されてもよい。この場合、動作認識部292は、加速度センサ28の出力を積分し、子供C1の移動速度を導出することにより、子供C1の移動速度を認識する。
<About recognition of moving speed>
Moreover, although the case where the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes the moving speed of the child C1 based on the detection signal output by the radar 22 has been described in the fourth modification described above, the present invention is not limited thereto. The moving speed of the child C1 may be recognized based on the output of the acceleration sensor 28, for example. In this case, the motion recognition unit 292 recognizes the moving speed of the child C1 by integrating the output of the acceleration sensor 28 and deriving the moving speed of the child C1.
<移動速度に基づく報知について>
 また、上述した第2変形例から第4変形例では、報知部421が、子供C1から地理的位置PT1までの距離に基づいて、報知を開始する場合について説明したが、これに限られない。報知部421は、子供C1の移動速度に基づいて、報知を行ってもよい。報知部421は、例えば、子供C1の移動速度が速い場合、移動速度が遅い場合と比して、報知の開始タイミングを速めてもよく、報知量を増加させてもよい。これにより、情報通信システム1Bは、走って道路に飛び出す可能性が高い子供C1に対して、早急に報知を行うことができる。
<Notice based on moving speed>
Moreover, although the notification part 421 demonstrated the case where the alerting | reporting part 421 starts alerting | reporting based on the distance from the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 in the 2nd to 4th modification mentioned above, it is not restricted to this. The notification unit 421 may perform notification based on the moving speed of the child C1. For example, when the moving speed of the child C1 is high, the notification unit 421 may increase the notification start timing or increase the notification amount as compared to the case where the movement speed is low. Thereby, the information communication system 1B can promptly notify the child C1 who is likely to run and jump out on the road.
<地理的位置の接近の判定について>
 また、上述した第3変形例及び第4変形例において、報知部421は、位置検出部24によって取得された子供C1の位置情報と、地理的位置情報とに基づいて、地理的位置PT1の接近を判定する場合について説明したが、これに限られない。報知部421は、子供C1の移動速度に基づいて、地理的位置PT1の予想到着時刻を導出し、導出した予想到着時刻に基づいて、地理的位置PT1に接近したか否かを判定してもよい。この場合、報知部421は、地理的位置PT1に到着する予想到着時刻を導出し、導出した予想到着時刻に基づいて、地理的位置PT1が接近したか否かを判定する。
<About judgment of approach of geographical location>
Further, in the third modification and the fourth modification described above, the notification unit 421 is based on the position information of the child C1 acquired by the position detection unit 24 and the geographical position information, and approaches the geographical position PT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notification unit 421 derives the predicted arrival time of the geographical position PT1 based on the moving speed of the child C1, and determines whether or not the geographical position PT1 is approached based on the derived predicted arrival time. Good. In this case, the notification unit 421 derives an expected arrival time to arrive at the geographical position PT1, and determines whether or not the geographical position PT1 has approached based on the derived expected arrival time.
<地理的位置の設定について>
 また、上述した第2変形例から第4変形例において、地理的位置PT1は、予め定められており、記憶部44Bに地理的位置情報として記憶される場合について説明したが、これに限られない。地理的位置PT1は、例えば、子供C1の保護者が所持する第2携帯端末3から指定されてもよい。この場合、第2携帯端末3は、第2携帯端末3の記憶部(不図示)に記憶されたプログラム(ソフトウェア)として、地理的位置PT1を設定する際に用いられるプログラム(ソフトウェア)を実行する。例えば、このプログラム(ソフトウェア)を実行することにより、地図画像が表示部34に表示される。保護者は、第2携帯端末3が備える受付部(不図示)に、子供C1の登下校時に歩行する経路の開始位置と終了位置とを入力する。受付部は、例えば、ボタン、キーボード及びマウス等の操作デバイスである。
 以降の説明において、受付部は、表示部34と一体に形成されるタッチパネルである場合について説明する。第2携帯端末3は、受付部によって受け付けられた開始位置と、終了位置とに基づいて、子供C1が歩行すると推定される複数の経路rtの候補を地図画像に重畳し、表示部34に提示する。保護者は、提示された複数の経路rtの候補のうち、実際に子供C1が歩行する経路rtを選択する。
<Regarding the geographical location>
In the second to fourth modifications described above, the geographical position PT1 is determined in advance and stored as the geographical position information in the storage unit 44B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . The geographical location PT1 may be specified from, for example, the second mobile terminal 3 possessed by the guardian of the child C1. In this case, the second portable terminal 3 executes a program (software) used when setting the geographical position PT1 as a program (software) stored in a storage unit (not shown) of the second portable terminal 3. . For example, a map image is displayed on the display unit 34 by executing this program (software). The guardian inputs the start position and the end position of the route on which the child C1 walks when going to and from school to a reception unit (not shown) provided in the second mobile terminal 3. The reception unit is an operation device such as a button, a keyboard, and a mouse, for example.
In the following description, a case where the reception unit is a touch panel formed integrally with the display unit 34 will be described. The second portable terminal 3 superimposes a plurality of route rt candidates that the child C1 is estimated to walk on the map image based on the start position and the end position received by the reception unit, and presents them on the display unit 34. To do. The guardian selects a route rt on which the child C1 actually walks from among the plurality of presented route rt candidates.
 次に、受付部は、選択(指定)された経路rt上において子供C1に所定動作を行わせたい地理的位置PT1を指定する保護者の操作を受け付ける。記憶部44Bの地理的位置PT1の情報には、保護者によって指定された地理的位置PT1を示す情報が含まれる。これにより、情報通信システム1Bは、保護者が指定した地理的位置PT1の接近を子供C1に報知することができる。 Next, the accepting unit accepts an operation of a guardian who designates the geographical position PT1 that the child C1 wants to perform a predetermined action on the selected (designated) route rt. The information on the geographical position PT1 of the storage unit 44B includes information indicating the geographical position PT1 designated by the guardian. Thereby, the information communication system 1B can notify the child C1 of the approach of the geographical position PT1 designated by the guardian.
 なお、受付部は、表示された地図画像に対して保護者が経路rtの位置をタッチパネルになぞって入力することにより、実際に子供C1が歩行する経路rtを指定してもよい。また、制御部36は、保護者の操作によって指定される位置(例えば、経路rtの開始位置、終了位置及び地理的位置PT1)が、経路rt上又は歩道上ではない場合、指定した位置の近傍の経路rt上又は歩道上の位置に補正してもよい。 Note that the accepting unit may designate the route rt on which the child C1 actually walks by inputting the position of the route rt on the touch panel by the guardian with respect to the displayed map image. In addition, when the position specified by the parent's operation (for example, the start position, the end position, and the geographical position PT1 of the route rt) is not on the route rt or on the sidewalk, the control unit 36 is in the vicinity of the specified position. It may be corrected to a position on the route rt or on the sidewalk.
<所定動作の報知について>
 また、上述では、報知部421が、地理的位置PT1の接近又は車両m若しくは不審者の接近を子供C1に報知する場合について説明したが、これに限られない。報知部421は、例えば、地理的位置PT1における所定動作を促す報知を行ってもよい。この場合、報知部421は、例えば、接近判定部291によって子供C1が地理的位置PT1に接近したと判定された場合、スピーカ26から「交差点では一時停止だよ!」又は「みぎ、ひだりを確認して、手を挙げて横断歩道を渡ろうね!」等の音声を出力することにより、所定動作を促す報知を行う。
<Regarding notification of a predetermined operation>
Moreover, although the alerting | reporting part 421 demonstrated the case where the alerting | reporting part 421 alert | reports the approach of the geographical position PT1 or the approach of the vehicle m or a suspicious person to the child C1, it is not restricted to this. For example, the notification unit 421 may perform notification that prompts a predetermined operation at the geographical position PT1. In this case, for example, when the approach determination unit 291 determines that the child C1 has approached the geographical position PT1, the notification unit 421 confirms “pause at the intersection!” Then, raise your hand and let's cross the pedestrian crossing! "
<所定動作の評価結果の報知について>
 また、報知部421は、子供C1が行った所定動作の評価結果を報知してもよい。この場合、報知部421は、第1携帯端末2Cから子供C1が所定動作を行ったことを示す情報を受信した場合、子供C1を称賛する報知を行ってもよい。子供C1を称賛する報知とは、バイブレータ25を所定のリズムによって振動させる、及び、スピーカ26から「右左の確認ができたね!えらい!」という子供C1を称賛する音声を出力させるなどの報知である。
 また、報知部421は、子供C1が地理的位置PT1において所定動作を行わなかった場合、子供C1を注意する報知を行ってもよい。子供C1を注意する報知とは、バイブレータ25を所定のリズムによって振動させる、及び、スピーカ26から「ちゃんと止まらないと危ないよ!」という子供C1を注意する音声を出力させるなどの報知である。報知部421は、所定動作が行われる度、又は、子供C1から地理的位置PT1までの距離が第1所定距離dt1未満になる度などに、所定動作の評価結果を報知してもよい。
<Notification of evaluation result of predetermined operation>
Moreover, the alerting | reporting part 421 may alert | report the evaluation result of the predetermined operation | movement which the child C1 performed. In this case, when the notification unit 421 receives information indicating that the child C1 has performed a predetermined operation from the first mobile terminal 2C, the notification unit 421 may perform notification that praises the child C1. The notification that praises the child C1 is notification that the vibrator 25 is vibrated according to a predetermined rhythm, and that the speaker 26 outputs a voice that praises the child C1 “You have confirmed right and left! .
Moreover, the alerting | reporting part 421 may alert | report the child C1 when the child C1 does not perform predetermined | prescribed operation | movement in the geographical position PT1. The notification that pays attention to the child C1 is notification that the vibrator 25 is vibrated according to a predetermined rhythm, and a sound that warns the child C1 that “It is dangerous if it does not stop properly” is output from the speaker 26. The notification unit 421 may notify the evaluation result of the predetermined operation every time the predetermined operation is performed, or whenever the distance from the child C1 to the geographical position PT1 becomes less than the first predetermined distance dt1.
 なお、報知部421は、地理的位置PT1、車両m又は不審者の接近を報知している場合、評価結果の報知を行わなくてもよい。これにより、報知部421は、地理的位置PT1、評価結果の報知が車両m又は不審者の報知を妨げることを抑制することができる。
 また、報知部421は、地理的位置PT1から第1所定距離dt1以内の範囲において、評価結果の報知を行わなくてもよい。これにより、報知部421は、評価結果の報知が地理的位置PT1、車両m又は不審者の報知を妨げることを抑制することができる。
In addition, the alerting | reporting part 421 does not need to alert | report the evaluation result, when notifying the approach of geographical position PT1, the vehicle m, or a suspicious person. Thereby, the alerting | reporting part 421 can suppress that alerting | reporting of the geographical position PT1 and an evaluation result disturbs alerting | reporting of the vehicle m or a suspicious person.
In addition, the notification unit 421 may not notify the evaluation result in a range within the first predetermined distance dt1 from the geographical position PT1. Thereby, the alerting | reporting part 421 can suppress that alerting | reporting of an evaluation result obstructs the alerting | reporting of geographical position PT1, the vehicle m, or a suspicious person.
<所定動作の採点について>
 また、制御部42Bは、子供C1が行った所定動作を採点する構成であってもよい。制御部42Bは、子供C1が地理的位置PT1において所定動作を行ったか、又は、所定動作を行わなかったかに基づいて、子供C1が行った所定動作を採点し、採点した結果を示す情報を、保護者の第2携帯端末3に送信してもよい。また、制御部42Bは、子供C1が地理的位置PT1に接近する度に、所定動作の採点結果を第2携帯端末3に送信してもよい。
<Regarding scoring of a predetermined action>
The control unit 42B may be configured to score a predetermined action performed by the child C1. The control unit 42B scores the predetermined action performed by the child C1 based on whether the child C1 performs the predetermined action at the geographical position PT1 or does not perform the predetermined action, and indicates information indicating the result of the scoring. You may transmit to the 2nd portable terminal 3 of a guardian. Further, the control unit 42B may transmit the scoring result of the predetermined operation to the second portable terminal 3 every time the child C1 approaches the geographical position PT1.
<情報通信システム1Bについて>
 なお、上述した第2変形例から第4変形例において、情報通信システム1Bのうち、第1携帯端末2、第1携帯端末2B又は第1携帯端末2Cが備える構成と、データセンター4Bが備える構成とについて説明したが、これに限られない。例えば、第1携帯端末2、第1携帯端末2B又は第1携帯端末2Cが備える構成が、データセンター4Bに備えられていてもよく、データセンター4Bに備えられる構成が第1携帯端末2、第1携帯端末2B又は第1携帯端末2Cに備えられていてもよい。また、記憶部44Bに記憶される情報が、第1携帯端末2、第1携帯端末2B又は第1携帯端末2Cの記憶部(不図示)に記憶されていてもよい。
 例えば、上述した第2変形例から第4変形例においては、データセンター4Bの報知部421が、第1携帯端末2の位置検出部24によって取得された位置情報と、記憶部44Bに記憶されている地理的位置情報とに基づいて、第1携帯端末2と地理的位置PT1の接近を判定するとしたが、これに限定されない。上述した第3変形例及び第4変形例に示す各第1携帯端末2B,2Cの接近判定部291が、データセンター4Bから地理的位置情報を受信して、第1携帯端末2と地理的位置PT1の接近を判定してもよい。
<About Information Communication System 1B>
In the second to fourth modifications described above, in the information communication system 1B, the configuration provided in the first mobile terminal 2, the first mobile terminal 2B, or the first mobile terminal 2C and the configuration provided in the data center 4B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration provided in the first mobile terminal 2, the first mobile terminal 2B, or the first mobile terminal 2C may be provided in the data center 4B, and the configuration provided in the data center 4B is the first mobile terminal 2, One mobile terminal 2B or the first mobile terminal 2C may be provided. Moreover, the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part 44B may be memorize | stored in the memory | storage part (not shown) of the 1st portable terminal 2, the 1st portable terminal 2B, or the 1st portable terminal 2C.
For example, in the second to fourth modifications described above, the notification unit 421 of the data center 4B is stored in the storage unit 44B and the position information acquired by the position detection unit 24 of the first mobile terminal 2. Although the approach between the first portable terminal 2 and the geographical position PT1 is determined based on the geographical position information that is present, the present invention is not limited to this. The proximity determination unit 291 of each of the first mobile terminals 2B and 2C shown in the third modification and the fourth modification described above receives the geographical position information from the data center 4B, and the first mobile terminal 2 and the geographical position You may determine the approach of PT1.
 上述した実施形態及び各変形例において、各第1携帯端末2,2B,2Cは、フロントレーダ及びリヤレーダによるレーダ22を備えるとしたが、これに限定されず、レーダ22の代わりに、カメラ、LIDAR(Light Detection and Ranging又はLaser Imaging Detection and Ranging)又は赤外線センサなどを備えてもよい。 In the embodiment and each modification described above, each first mobile terminal 2, 2 </ b> B, 2 </ b> C includes the radar 22 by the front radar and the rear radar. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the radar 22, a camera, LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging or Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging) or an infrared sensor may be provided.
 なお、本発明における各データセンター4,4A,4Bの機能の全て又は一部を実現するためのプログラムをコンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録して、この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行することにより各データセンター4,4A,4Bが行う処理の全て又は一部を行ってもよい。なお、ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、OSや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。また、「コンピュータシステム」は、ホームページ提供環境(又は表示環境)を備えたWWWシステムも含むものとする。また、「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、フレキシブルディスク、光磁気ディスク、ROM及びCD-ROM等の可搬媒体、並びにコンピュータシステムに内蔵されるハードディスク等の記憶装置のことをいう。さらに「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、インターネット等のネットワーク又は電話回線等の通信回線を介してプログラムが送信された場合のサーバ又はクライアントとなるコンピュータシステム内部の揮発性メモリ(RAM)のように、一定時間プログラムを保持しているものも含むものとする。 A program for realizing all or part of the functions of the data centers 4, 4A, 4B in the present invention is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium is stored in a computer system. You may perform all or one part of the processing which each data center 4, 4A, 4B performs by making it read and execute. Here, the “computer system” includes an OS and hardware such as peripheral devices. The “computer system” includes a WWW system having a homepage providing environment (or display environment). The “computer-readable recording medium” means a portable medium such as a flexible disk, a magneto-optical disk, a ROM and a CD-ROM, and a storage device such as a hard disk built in the computer system. Further, the “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a volatile memory (RAM) inside a computer system that becomes a server or a client when a program is transmitted via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line. In addition, those holding programs for a certain period of time are also included.
 また、上記プログラムは、このプログラムを記憶装置等に格納したコンピュータシステムから、伝送媒体を介して、又は、伝送媒体中の伝送波により他のコンピュータシステムに伝送されてもよい。ここで、プログラムを伝送する「伝送媒体」は、インターネット等のネットワーク(通信網)又は電話回線等の通信回線(通信線)のように情報を伝送する機能を有する媒体のことをいう。また、上記プログラムは、前述した機能の一部を実現するためのものであってもよい。さらに、前述した機能をコンピュータシステムにすでに記録されているプログラムとの組み合わせで実現できるもの、いわゆる差分ファイル(差分プログラム)であってもよい。 Further, the program may be transmitted from a computer system storing the program in a storage device or the like to another computer system via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium. Here, the “transmission medium” for transmitting the program refers to a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line. The program may be for realizing a part of the functions described above. Furthermore, what can implement | achieve the function mentioned above in combination with the program already recorded on the computer system, what is called a difference file (difference program) may be sufficient.
 本発明の実施形態は、例として提示したものであり、発明の範囲を限定することは意図していない。これら実施形態は、その他の様々な形態で実施されることが可能であり、発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲で、種々の省略、置き換え、変更を行うことができる。これら実施形態やその変形は、発明の範囲や要旨に含まれると同様に、特許請求の範囲に記載された発明とその均等の範囲に含まれるものである。 The embodiment of the present invention is presented as an example, and is not intended to limit the scope of the invention. These embodiments can be implemented in various other forms, and various omissions, replacements, and changes can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. These embodiments and their modifications are included in the scope and gist of the invention, and are also included in the invention described in the claims and the equivalents thereof.
 本発明によれば、移動者の所定動作を確認することが可能な動作確認システムを提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an operation confirmation system capable of confirming a predetermined operation of a mobile person.
1,1A,1B…情報通信システム(動作確認システム)、2,2B,2C…第1携帯端末(端末)、3…第2携帯端末(他の端末)、4,4A,4B…データセンター(サーバ)、5…サーバ、6…ネットワーク、21…通信部、22…レーダ(動作取得部、速度取得部、遠隔検出部、受信部)、23…マイクロフォン、24…位置検出部(位置取得部)、25…バイブレータ(報知部)、26…スピーカ(報知部)、27…表示部、28…加速度センサ(速度取得部、検出装置)、29…制御部(報知部)、31…通信部、32…マイクロフォン、33…操作部、34…表示部(位置設定部)、35…スピーカ、36…制御部(報知部、位置設定部、位置補正部)、41…通信部、42,42A,42B…制御部(位置取得部、位置判断部、報知部、動作取得部、動作判断部、評価部)、43…モデル記憶部、44,44A,44B…記憶部、45…音声認識モデル記憶部、46…音声認識部、47…シナリオ記憶部、292…動作認識部(動作判断部、速度取得部、出力部)、421…報知部(報知修正部、出力部)、ARP…所定範囲(離隔位置、報知領域)、C1…子供(移動者、歩行者、児童)、PT1…地理的位置(第1設定位置) 1, 1A, 1B ... Information communication system (operation check system), 2, 2B, 2C ... First mobile terminal (terminal), 3 ... Second mobile terminal (other terminals), 4, 4A, 4B ... Data center ( Server), 5 ... server, 6 ... network, 21 ... communication unit, 22 ... radar (operation acquisition unit, speed acquisition unit, remote detection unit, reception unit), 23 ... microphone, 24 ... position detection unit (position acquisition unit) , 25 ... Vibrator (notification part), 26 ... Speaker (notification part), 27 ... Display part, 28 ... Acceleration sensor (speed acquisition part, detection device), 29 ... Control part (notification part), 31 ... Communication part, 32 ... Microphone, 33 ... Operation part, 34 ... Display part (position setting part), 35 ... Speaker, 36 ... Control part (notification part, position setting part, position correction part), 41 ... Communication part, 42, 42A, 42B ... Control unit (position acquisition unit, position determination , Notification unit, operation acquisition unit, operation determination unit, evaluation unit), 43 ... model storage unit, 44, 44A, 44B ... storage unit, 45 ... voice recognition model storage unit, 46 ... voice recognition unit, 47 ... scenario storage unit 292 ... Motion recognition unit (motion determination unit, speed acquisition unit, output unit), 421 ... Notification unit (notification correction unit, output unit), ARP ... Predetermined range (separation position, notification region), C1 ... Child (moving person) , Pedestrians, children), PT1 ... Geographical position (first set position)

Claims (44)

  1.  移動者によって携帯される端末と、
     前記移動者の動作を取得する動作取得部と、
     前記端末又は前記端末と通信可能なサーバに設けられるとともに、前記動作取得部が取得した動作に基づき所定動作が行われたことを判断する動作判断部と
    を備える動作確認システム。
    A device carried by a traveler,
    An action acquisition unit for acquiring the movement of the mobile person;
    An operation confirmation system provided with the terminal or a server communicable with the terminal, and an operation determination unit that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed based on the operation acquired by the operation acquisition unit.
  2.  前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の前進移動を取得し、
     前記動作判断部は、前記移動者が前進移動から該前進移動を止める前進移動停止となったことを判断する
    請求項1に記載の動作確認システム。
    The motion acquisition unit acquires the forward movement of the mobile person,
    The operation check system according to claim 1, wherein the operation determination unit determines that the moving person has stopped from moving forward to stop moving forward.
  3.  前記動作取得部は、前記端末の現在位置を取得する位置取得部を含み、
     前記動作判断部は、前記位置取得部が取得した前記現在位置に基づき判断する
    請求項2に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation acquisition unit includes a position acquisition unit that acquires a current position of the terminal,
    The operation check system according to claim 2, wherein the operation determination unit makes a determination based on the current position acquired by the position acquisition unit.
  4.  前記位置取得部は、前記端末の外部から受ける電磁波により測位する
    請求項3に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation confirmation system according to claim 3, wherein the position acquisition unit performs positioning using electromagnetic waves received from outside the terminal.
  5.  前記位置取得部は、周辺物体からの電磁波と記憶された地図情報との照会に基づいて測位する
    請求項3に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation confirmation system according to claim 3, wherein the position acquisition unit performs positioning based on an inquiry between electromagnetic waves from a peripheral object and stored map information.
  6.  前記動作取得部は、前記端末の移動速度を取得する速度取得部を含み、
     前記動作判断部は、前記速度取得部が取得した前記移動速度に基づいて判断する
    請求項2に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation acquisition unit includes a speed acquisition unit that acquires a moving speed of the terminal,
    The operation check system according to claim 2, wherein the operation determination unit makes a determination based on the moving speed acquired by the speed acquisition unit.
  7.  前記速度取得部は、前記端末に設けられるとともに、物理量を検出する検出装置である
    請求項6に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 6, wherein the speed acquisition unit is a detection device that is provided in the terminal and detects a physical quantity.
  8.  前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の頭部の動作を取得し、
     前記動作判断部は、前記頭部が前記移動者の移動方向に対する左右に振られたことを判断する
    請求項1に記載の動作確認システム。
    The motion acquisition unit acquires the motion of the moving person's head,
    The operation check system according to claim 1, wherein the operation determination unit determines that the head is swung left and right with respect to the moving direction of the mobile person.
  9.  前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の顔の向きを取得し、
     前記動作判断部は、前記顔の向きが前記移動者の移動方向に対する左右に向けられたことを判断する
    請求項1に記載の動作確認システム。
    The motion acquisition unit acquires the face orientation of the mobile person,
    The operation check system according to claim 1, wherein the operation determination unit determines that the orientation of the face is directed to the left and right with respect to the moving direction of the moving person.
  10.  前記動作取得部は、前記移動者の手部の位置及び動きのうち少なくともいずれかを取得し、
     前記動作判断部は、前記手部が前記移動者の肩部よりも高い領域である所定領域に位置することを判断する
    請求項1に記載の動作確認システム。
    The motion acquisition unit acquires at least one of the position and movement of the hand of the mobile person,
    The operation check system according to claim 1, wherein the operation determination unit determines that the hand portion is located in a predetermined area which is an area higher than a shoulder portion of the moving person.
  11.  前記動作取得部は、前記端末の外の物体の位置及び動きのうち少なくともいずれかを遠隔で検出する遠隔検出部を含む
    請求項8から請求項10のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation confirmation system according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein the operation acquisition unit includes a remote detection unit that remotely detects at least one of a position and a movement of an object outside the terminal.
  12.  前記遠隔検出部は、前記物体からの電磁波を受ける受信部を備え、
     前記端末は、前記所定領域に位置する前記手部が前記受信部の検出範囲内となるよう配置される
    請求項10に従属する請求項11に記載の動作確認システム。
    The remote detection unit includes a reception unit that receives electromagnetic waves from the object,
    The operation check system according to claim 11, which is dependent on claim 10, wherein the terminal is arranged such that the hand portion located in the predetermined area is within a detection range of the reception unit.
  13.  前記端末は、前記移動者の頭部が更に前記受信部の検出範囲内となるよう配置される
    請求項12に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 12, wherein the terminal is arranged such that a head of the mobile person is further within a detection range of the receiving unit.
  14.  前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記所定動作がなされるよう事前に設定された地理的位置である設定位置を記憶する記憶部を備える
    請求項1から請求項13のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the terminal or the server includes a storage unit that stores a set position that is a geographical position set in advance so that the predetermined operation is performed. system.
  15.  前記設定位置は、前記移動者が通行する道路において、前記移動者に対する危険が発生する可能性がある特定位置に設定される
    請求項14に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 14, wherein the set position is set to a specific position where there is a possibility of danger to the mobile person on a road on which the mobile person passes.
  16.  前記道路は、該道路が交差する交差点を含み、
     前記設定位置は、前記交差点に設定される
    請求項15に記載の動作確認システム。
    The road includes an intersection where the road intersects,
    The operation check system according to claim 15, wherein the set position is set at the intersection.
  17.  前記道路は、車両が通行する車道と区画された歩道を含み、
     前記設定位置は、前記交差点における前記歩道上に設定される
    請求項16に記載の動作確認システム。
    The road includes a roadway through which vehicles pass and a sidewalk partitioned.
    The operation check system according to claim 16, wherein the set position is set on the sidewalk at the intersection.
  18.  前記設定位置は、前記移動者の移動起点と移動終点とに関する入力情報に基づいて、前記移動起点と前記移動終点との経路上に設定される
     請求項14から請求項17のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The said setting position is set on the path | route of the said movement start point and the said movement end point based on the input information regarding the movement start point and the movement end point of the said mover. The operation check system described.
  19.  前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記移動起点と前記移動終点とに基づいて、前記経路上に前記設定位置を設定する位置設定部を備える
    請求項18に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 18, wherein the terminal or the server includes a position setting unit that sets the set position on the route based on the movement start point and the movement end point.
  20.  前記設定位置は、前記端末又は該端末とは異なる他の端末に対する位置指定に関する入力情報に基づいて設定される
    請求項14から請求項17のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to any one of claims 14 to 17, wherein the set position is set based on input information related to position designation for the terminal or another terminal different from the terminal.
  21.  前記入力情報は、道路部領域と非道路部領域とを含む地図上の位置を示し、
     前記入力情報が前記非道路部領域に位置する場合、前記入力情報を近接する前記道路部領域に補正する位置補正部を備える
    請求項20に記載の動作確認システム。
    The input information indicates a position on a map including a road area and a non-road area,
    The operation check system according to claim 20, further comprising a position correction unit that corrects the input information to the adjacent road part area when the input information is located in the non-road part area.
  22.  前記道路部領域は、車道部領域と歩道部領域とを含み、
     前記位置補正部は、前記入力情報が前記非道路部領域又は前記車道部領域に位置する場合、前記入力情報を近接する前記歩道部領域に補正する
    請求項21に記載の動作確認システム。
    The road area includes a road area and a sidewalk area,
    The operation check system according to claim 21, wherein when the input information is located in the non-road part region or the roadway region, the position correction unit corrects the input information to the adjacent sidewalk part region.
  23.  前記移動者によって前記所定動作がなされるよう事前に設定された地理的位置である設定位置は、第1設定位置と前記第1設定位置とは別の第2設定位置とを含み、
     前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記第1設定位置において前記動作判断部が判断した第1判断結果及び前記第2設定位置において前記動作判断部が判断した第2判断結果に基づいて、前記移動者の動作を複合的に評価する評価部を備える
    請求項1から請求項22のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The set position that is a geographical position set in advance so that the predetermined operation is performed by the mover includes a first set position and a second set position different from the first set position,
    The terminal or the server, based on the first determination result determined by the operation determination unit at the first setting position and the second determination result determined by the operation determination unit at the second setting position, The operation check system according to any one of claims 1 to 22, further comprising an evaluation unit that evaluates the operation in a composite manner.
  24.  前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記端末の外部又は前記端末若しくは前記サーバと通信可能に設けられる他の端末に対して、前記評価を出力する出力部を備える
    請求項23に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 23, wherein the terminal or the server includes an output unit that outputs the evaluation to the outside of the terminal or another terminal provided to be communicable with the terminal or the server.
  25.  前記出力部は、前記端末の外部に前記評価を出力するとともに、前記設定位置の近傍では出力しない
    請求項24に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 24, wherein the output unit outputs the evaluation to the outside of the terminal and does not output in the vicinity of the set position.
  26.  前記出力部は、前記他の端末に対して前記評価を出力するとともに、前記設定位置における前記評価の後に順次出力する
    請求項24に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 24, wherein the output unit outputs the evaluation to the other terminal and sequentially outputs the evaluation after the evaluation at the set position.
  27.  前記動作判断部は、前記端末に設けられ、
     前記評価部は、前記サーバに設けられる
    請求項23から請求項26のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation determination unit is provided in the terminal,
    27. The operation check system according to claim 23, wherein the evaluation unit is provided in the server.
  28.  前記端末又は前記サーバに設けられるとともに、事前に設定された地理的位置である設定位置を記憶する記憶部と、
     前記設定位置に対して所定だけ離隔した離隔位置において前記設定位置への前記端末の接近を報知する報知部と
    を備える
    請求項1から請求項27のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    A storage unit that is provided in the terminal or the server and stores a set position that is a preset geographical position;
    The operation check system according to any one of claims 1 to 27, further comprising: a notifying unit that notifies the approach of the terminal to the set position at a predetermined distance from the set position.
  29.  前記報知部は、前記端末が前記離隔位置から前記設定位置に近づくほど、前記報知の量を増加させる
    請求項28に記載の動作確認システム。
    29. The operation confirmation system according to claim 28, wherein the notification unit increases the amount of the notification as the terminal approaches the set position from the separation position.
  30.  前記報知部は、前記報知の開始後に前記端末が前記設定位置から遠ざかるほど、前記報知の量を減少させる
    請求項28又は請求項29に記載の動作確認システム。
    30. The operation check system according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the notification unit decreases the notification amount as the terminal moves away from the set position after the notification is started.
  31.  前記報知部は、前記報知の開始後に前記動作判断部が前記所定動作を判断した場合に前記報知を停止する
    請求項28から請求項30のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to any one of claims 28 to 30, wherein the notification unit stops the notification when the operation determination unit determines the predetermined operation after the start of the notification.
  32.  前記報知部は、前記報知の開始後に前記端末が前記設定位置に対して所定だけ離隔した場合に前記報知を停止する
    請求項28から請求項31のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to any one of claims 28 to 31, wherein the notification unit stops the notification when the terminal is separated from the set position by a predetermined distance after the notification is started.
  33.  前記端末又は前記サーバは、
     前記端末の現在位置を取得する位置取得部と、
     前記現在位置に基づき前記端末が前記離隔位置よりも前記設定位置に近い領域である報知領域内に位置することを判断する位置判断部と
    を備える
    請求項28から請求項32のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The terminal or the server is
    A position acquisition unit for acquiring a current position of the terminal;
    The position determination part which determines that the said terminal is located in the alerting | reporting area | region which is an area | region closer to the said setting position than the said separation position based on the said present position is provided in any one of Claim 28 to 32. The operation check system described.
  34.  前記位置判断部は、前記現在位置と前記設定位置との直線距離に基づき前記端末が前記報知領域内に位置することを判断する
    請求項33に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 33, wherein the position determination unit determines that the terminal is located in the notification area based on a linear distance between the current position and the set position.
  35.  前記端末又は前記サーバは、前記端末の移動速度を取得する速度取得部を備え、
     前記報知部は、前記移動速度に基づき前記報知を修正する報知修正部を備える
    請求項33又は請求項34に記載の動作確認システム。
    The terminal or the server includes a speed acquisition unit that acquires a moving speed of the terminal,
    The operation check system according to claim 33 or 34, wherein the notification unit includes a notification correction unit that corrects the notification based on the moving speed.
  36.  前記報知修正部は、前記移動速度が速いほど、遅いときに比べて、前記報知の開始が早くなるよう修正する
    請求項35に記載の動作確認システム。
    36. The operation check system according to claim 35, wherein the notification correction unit corrects the notification so that the start of the notification is earlier as the moving speed is higher than when the notification is slower.
  37.  前記報知修正部は、前記移動速度が速いほど、遅いときに比べて、前記報知の量が増加するよう修正する
    請求項35に記載の動作確認システム。
    36. The operation confirmation system according to claim 35, wherein the notification correction unit corrects the notification amount so that the amount of the notification increases as the moving speed increases.
  38.  前記端末又は前記サーバは、
     前記端末の移動速度を取得する速度取得部と、
     前記移動速度に基づき前記端末が前記離隔位置に到達したことを判断する位置判断部と
    を備える
    請求項28から請求項32のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The terminal or the server is
    A speed acquisition unit for acquiring the moving speed of the terminal;
    The operation check system according to any one of claims 28 to 32, further comprising: a position determination unit that determines that the terminal has reached the separation position based on the moving speed.
  39.  前記位置判断部は、前記移動速度に基づいて求めた前記設定位置までの到達時間に基づき前記離隔位置に到達したことを判断する
    請求項38に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation confirmation system according to claim 38, wherein the position determination unit determines that the remote position has been reached based on an arrival time to the set position obtained based on the moving speed.
  40.  前記移動者は、歩行者である
    請求項1から請求項39のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to any one of claims 1 to 39, wherein the mobile person is a pedestrian.
  41.  前記歩行者は、児童である
    請求項40に記載の動作確認システム。
    The operation check system according to claim 40, wherein the pedestrian is a child.
  42.  前記端末は、前記移動者の携行物に配置される
    請求項1から請求項41のいずれか一項に記載の動作確認システム。
    42. The operation check system according to any one of claims 1 to 41, wherein the terminal is disposed on an object carried by the mobile person.
  43.  前記携行物は、肩掛け鞄である
    請求項42に記載の動作確認システム。
    43. The operation check system according to claim 42, wherein the carrying item is a shoulder bag.
  44.  前記肩掛け鞄は、背負い鞄である
    請求項43に記載の動作確認システム。
    44. The operation check system according to claim 43, wherein the shoulder bag is a shoulder bag.
PCT/JP2019/022897 2018-06-11 2019-06-10 Action verifying system WO2019240070A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020525549A JPWO2019240070A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-06-10 Operation check system

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018111419 2018-06-11
JP2018-111419 2018-06-11
JP2018-146316 2018-08-02
JP2018146316 2018-08-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019240070A1 true WO2019240070A1 (en) 2019-12-19

Family

ID=68842253

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/022888 WO2019240065A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-06-10 Action evaluation system
PCT/JP2019/022897 WO2019240070A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-06-10 Action verifying system

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/022888 WO2019240065A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-06-10 Action evaluation system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (2) JP7424974B2 (en)
WO (2) WO2019240065A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7494825B2 (en) 2021-10-05 2024-06-04 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Learning Support Devices

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023203972A1 (en) * 2022-04-20 2023-10-26 ソニーグループ株式会社 Information processing system, server, and information processing method

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05232873A (en) * 1992-02-19 1993-09-10 Honda Motor Co Ltd Vehicle travel guide device
JP2005106742A (en) * 2003-10-01 2005-04-21 Clarion Co Ltd Navigation system, method and program
JP2009009281A (en) * 2007-06-27 2009-01-15 Ntt Docomo Inc Traffic accident prevention system, server device and traffic accident prevention method
JP2009123105A (en) * 2007-11-16 2009-06-04 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Information notification system, mobile terminal device, vehicle-mounted device, and method for sending information
JP2010041281A (en) * 2008-08-04 2010-02-18 Yupiteru Corp Vehicle warning device
WO2010109836A1 (en) * 2009-03-24 2010-09-30 シャープ株式会社 Notification device, notification system, method for controlling notification device, control program, and computer readable recording medium having the program recorded thereupon
JP2011209794A (en) * 2010-03-29 2011-10-20 Hiromitsu Hama Object recognition system, monitoring system using the same, and watching system
JP2014009984A (en) * 2012-06-28 2014-01-20 Zenrin Datacom Co Ltd Route search system, portable terminal, and route guiding method
JP2015184975A (en) * 2014-03-25 2015-10-22 富士通テン株式会社 Device for vehicle and vehicle control method
WO2016111067A1 (en) * 2015-01-05 2016-07-14 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and program
WO2018008314A1 (en) * 2016-07-07 2018-01-11 株式会社デンソー Pedestrian detection device and pedestrian detection method

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005275529A (en) 2004-03-23 2005-10-06 Fujitsu Ltd Information management method and information management device
JP4981610B2 (en) * 2007-10-05 2012-07-25 三菱電機ビルテクノサービス株式会社 Air conditioning control system

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05232873A (en) * 1992-02-19 1993-09-10 Honda Motor Co Ltd Vehicle travel guide device
JP2005106742A (en) * 2003-10-01 2005-04-21 Clarion Co Ltd Navigation system, method and program
JP2009009281A (en) * 2007-06-27 2009-01-15 Ntt Docomo Inc Traffic accident prevention system, server device and traffic accident prevention method
JP2009123105A (en) * 2007-11-16 2009-06-04 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Information notification system, mobile terminal device, vehicle-mounted device, and method for sending information
JP2010041281A (en) * 2008-08-04 2010-02-18 Yupiteru Corp Vehicle warning device
WO2010109836A1 (en) * 2009-03-24 2010-09-30 シャープ株式会社 Notification device, notification system, method for controlling notification device, control program, and computer readable recording medium having the program recorded thereupon
JP2011209794A (en) * 2010-03-29 2011-10-20 Hiromitsu Hama Object recognition system, monitoring system using the same, and watching system
JP2014009984A (en) * 2012-06-28 2014-01-20 Zenrin Datacom Co Ltd Route search system, portable terminal, and route guiding method
JP2015184975A (en) * 2014-03-25 2015-10-22 富士通テン株式会社 Device for vehicle and vehicle control method
WO2016111067A1 (en) * 2015-01-05 2016-07-14 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and program
WO2018008314A1 (en) * 2016-07-07 2018-01-11 株式会社デンソー Pedestrian detection device and pedestrian detection method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7494825B2 (en) 2021-10-05 2024-06-04 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Learning Support Devices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2019240065A1 (en) 2019-12-19
JPWO2019240070A1 (en) 2021-07-29
JPWO2019240065A1 (en) 2021-06-24
JP7424974B2 (en) 2024-01-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11663516B2 (en) Artificial intelligence apparatus and method for updating artificial intelligence model
US11455792B2 (en) Robot capable of detecting dangerous situation using artificial intelligence and method of operating the same
US11302311B2 (en) Artificial intelligence apparatus for recognizing speech of user using personalized language model and method for the same
US11495214B2 (en) Artificial intelligence device for providing voice recognition service and method of operating the same
US11164586B2 (en) Artificial intelligence apparatus and method for recognizing utterance voice of user
KR20190083317A (en) An artificial intelligence apparatus for providing notification related to lane-change of vehicle and method for the same
JP2024028516A (en) Notification system
US20210173614A1 (en) Artificial intelligence device and method for operating the same
US11755033B2 (en) Artificial intelligence device installed in vehicle and method therefor
US11398222B2 (en) Artificial intelligence apparatus and method for recognizing speech of user in consideration of user&#39;s application usage log
US11182922B2 (en) AI apparatus and method for determining location of user
US11810575B2 (en) Artificial intelligence robot for providing voice recognition function and method of operating the same
WO2019240070A1 (en) Action verifying system
US11769047B2 (en) Artificial intelligence apparatus using a plurality of output layers and method for same
US11449074B2 (en) Robot for providing guidance service using artificial intelligence and method of operating the same
US11322134B2 (en) Artificial intelligence device and operating method thereof
US11074814B2 (en) Portable apparatus for providing notification
US11977384B2 (en) Control system for controlling a plurality of robots using artificial intelligence
WO2020203605A1 (en) Notification system, notification method, program, and storage medium
JP7289618B2 (en) Notification system
WO2020203691A1 (en) Display system, display method, program, and storage medium
JP7442295B2 (en) Electronics
JP2020166507A (en) Electronic apparatus
JP2020022128A (en) Terminal device
CN117092639A (en) Obstacle avoidance method, obstacle avoidance system, head-mounted device and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19819319

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020525549

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19819319

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1